Panasonic DMREX645EP Operating instructions
- Category
- Mixer/food processor accessories
- Type
- Operating instructions
Brzi vodičOsnovne
radnje
until
2011/8/31
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX645
Notice for DVB functions
≥DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
≥This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not pay TV
or encrypted channels.
≥TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does not support analogue broadcasts.
About descriptions in these
operating instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are
indicated as “> ±±”.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they
are sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2 ALL
3
5
2
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
VQT3F54
EP
Quick Start
Guide
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 1 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
until
2011/8/31
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX645
Notice for DVB functions
≥DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
≥This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not pay TV
or encrypted channels.
≥TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does not support analogue broadcasts.
About descriptions in these
operating instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are
indicated as “> ±±”.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they
are sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2 ALL
3
5
2
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
VQT3F54
EP
Quick Start
Guide
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 1 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
until
2011/8/31
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX645
Notice for DVB functions
≥DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
≥This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not pay TV
or encrypted channels.
≥TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does not support analogue broadcasts.
About descriptions in these
operating instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are
indicated as “> ±±”.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they
are sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2 ALL
3
5
2
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
VQT3F54
EP
Quick Start
Guide
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 1 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
until
2011/8/31
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX645
Notice for DVB functions
≥DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
≥This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not pay TV
or encrypted channels.
≥TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does not support analogue broadcasts.
About descriptions in these
operating instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are
indicated as “> ±±”.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they
are sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2 ALL
3
5
2
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
VQT3F54
EP
Quick Start
Guide
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 1 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
Upute za uporabu
DVD snimač
Model br. DMR-EX645
Poštovani,
zahvaljujemo na kupnji ovog proizvoda. Za optimalan rad i sigurnost pažljivo pročitajte ove upute.
Prije povezivanja, uporabe ili podešavanja uređaja u cijelosti pročitajte ove upute.
Ovaj priručnik zadržite za buduću uporabu.
Napomena o DVB funkcijama
• DVB i DVB logotipovi zaštitni su znakovi konzorcija DVB Project.
• Ovaj je DVD snimač namijenjen samo za gledanje i snimanje besplatnih kanala, a ne
kanala koji se plaćaju ili šifriranih kanala.
• Sustav TV vodiča ovog DVD snimača ne podržava analogna odašiljanja.
Regionalni broj koji podržava ovaj uređaj
Regionalni brojevi dodijeljeni su DVD snimačima i DVD-Videu prema mjestu njihove
prodaje.
• Regionalni broj ovog uređaja je “2”.
• Uređaj će reproducirati DVD-Videozapise s oznakom “2” ili “ALL”.
Primjer:
Internetska stranica: http://www.panasonic.hr
VQT3F54
Opisi u ovim uputama za uporabu
• Stranice na koje se upućuje
označene su kao "→ OO".
EP
Isporučeni pribor
2
VQT3F54
Safety precautions
∫ Unit
≥To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,
– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing.
– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on this
unit.
– Use only the recommended accessories.
– Do not remove covers.
– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to qualified
service personnel.
– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.
– Do not place heavy items on this unit.
∫ AC mains lead
≥To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,
– Ensure that the power supply voltage corresponds to the voltage
printed on this unit.
– Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet.
– Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
– Do not handle the plug with wet hands.
– Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the plug.
– Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.
≥Install this unit so that the AC mains lead can be unplugged from
the socket outlet immediately if any problem occurs.
∫ Unit
≥This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
≥Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted candles, on
this unit.
≥This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference occurs, please
increase separation between this unit and the mobile telephone.
≥This unit is intended for use in moderate climates.
∫ Placement
≥Place this unit on an even surface.
≥To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,
– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in cabinet or
in another confined space. Ensure this unit is well ventilated.
– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with newspapers,
tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.
– Do not expose this unit to direct sunlight, high temperatures,
high humidity, and excessive vibration.
∫ Batteries
≥Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the type recommended by the manufacturer.
≥Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and may
cause a fire.
– Do not mix old and new batteries or different types at the same
time.
– Do not heat or expose to flame.
– Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight
for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
– Do not take apart or short circuit.
– Do not recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
– Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
– Remove batteries if you do not intend to use the remote control
for a long period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
≥When disposing the batteries, please contact your local authorities
or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
WARNING
CAUTION
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
(Inside of product)
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 2 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
2
KLASA 1
LASERSKI PROIZVOD
(unutrašnjost uređaja)
UPOZORENJE
■ Uređaj
• Da biste spriječili požar, električni udar ili oštećenje proizvoda:
– Uređaj nemojte izlagati kiši, vlazi, kapanju ili prskanju.
– Na uređaj nemojte stavljati posude s tekućinom, kao što su
vaze.
– Koristite samo preporučeni pribor.
– Nemojte uklanjati poklopce.
– Nemojte sami popravljati uređaj. Servisiranje povjerite
kvaliciranom osoblju.
– Pazite da u uređaj ne dospiju metalni predmeti.
– Na uređaj nemojte stavljati teške predmete.
■ Mrežni kabel
• Da biste spriječili požar, električni udar ili oštećenje proizvoda:
– Provjerite odgovara li napon mreže naponu naznačenom na
ovom uređaju.
– Utikač umetnite u strujnu utičnicu.
– Kabel nemojte vući, savijati niti na njega stavljati teške
predmete.
– Utikač nemojte dirati mokrim rukama.
– Pri iskopčavanju utikač držite za tijelo.
– Nemojte koristiti oštećeni utikač ili strujnu utičnicu.
• Postavite uređaj tako da se mrežni kabel u slučaju problema može
odmah izvući iz strujne utičnice.
OPREZ
■ Uređaj
• Ovaj uređaj koristi laser. Uporaba kontrola ili podešavanja te
načini rukovanja koji nisu opisani u ovom priručniku mogu dovesti
do izlaganja opasnom zračenju.
• Na uređaj nemojte stavljati izvore otvorenog plamena, kao što su
upaljene svijeće.
• Mobilni telefoni mogu izazvati radijske smetnje za vrijeme
korištenja uređaja. Ako se pojave takve smetnje, povećajte
udaljenost između uređaja i mobilnog telefona.
• Ovaj je uređaj namijenjen za uporabu u umjerenim klimatskim
uvjetima.
■ Postavljanje
• Uređaj postavite na ravnu površinu.
• Da biste spriječili požar, električni udar ili oštećenje proizvoda:
– Uređaj nemojte postaviti u ormar, ugrađeni ormarić ili u drugi
ograničeni prostor. Uređaj mora biti na dobro prozračenom
mjestu.
– Otvore za provjetravanje uređaja nemojte zaklanjati novinama,
stolnjacima, zavjesama i sličnim predmetima.
– Uređaj nemojte izlagati izravnoj sunčevoj svjetlosti, visokim
temperaturama, visokoj vlazi i prekomjernim vibracijama.
■ Baterije
• U slučaju nepravilne zamjene baterije postoji opasnost od
eksplozije. Baterije zamijenite isključivo onom vrstom baterija koju
preporučuje proizvođač.
• Pogrešno rukovanje baterijama može prouzročiti curenje
elektrolita, što može izazvati požar.
– Nemojte miješati stare i nove baterije ni istovremeno koristiti
različite vrste baterija.
– Nemojte zagrijavati i izlagati otvorenom plamenu.
– Bateriju(e) nemojte ostavljati dulje vrijeme u vozilu koje je
izravno izloženo sunčevoj svjetlosti sa zatvorenim vratima i
prozorima.
– Nemojte rastavljati ili kratko spajati baterije.
– Nemojte ponovno puniti alkalne ili manganske baterije.
– Nemojte koristiti oguljene baterije.
– Ako daljinski upravljač ne namjeravate upotrebljavati dulje
vrijeme, izvadite baterije. Spremite ih na hladno, tamno mjesto.
• Ako želite odložiti baterije, obratite se lokalnim vlastima ili
prodavaču i raspitajte se o pravilnom načinu odlaganja.
Mjere opreza
Brzi vodič PripremaNapredne
funkcije
Kopiranje Osnovne
radnje
UređivanjePostavljanje
izbornika
Napomene
VQT3F54
3
Mjere opreza........................................................................ 2
Priprema
Isporučeni pribor ................................................................ 4
Podaci o daljinskom upravljaču ........................................ 4
Zaštita uređaja .................................................................... 4
Održavanje tvrdog diska (HDD-a) ..................................... 5
Brzi vodič
Vodič kroz kontrole ............................................................ 6
Brzi pristup raznim funkcijama
– Zaslon s IZBORNIKOM FUNKCIJA ................................. 7
1. KORAK Povezivanje ....................................................... 8
2. KORAK Postavke prijma kanala i formata TV
prijamnika.......................................................................... 10
Podaci o HDD-u i disku .....................................................11
Podaci o USB memoriji .................................................... 13
DivX datoteke, glazbene datoteke i fotograje
(JPEG)................................................................................ 13
Rukovanje medijima (Disk/USB memorija) .................... 14
Osnovne radnje
Gledanje TV-a .................................................................... 15
Prikaz teleteksta (samo za digitalno odašiljanje) .......... 17
Reproduciranje snimljenog videosadržaja/
Reproduciranje diskova play-only .................................. 18
Snimanje televizijskih programa .................................... 19
Snimanje mjeračem vremena ......................................... 20
Brisanje naslova ............................................................... 21
Napredne funkcije
Napomene u vezi sa snimanjem ..................................... 22
Opće napomene u vezi sa snimanjem ....................................... 22
Snimanje na diskove................................................................... 22
Načini snimanja i približno trajanje snimanja/kopiranja .............. 23
Prikaz zaslona za potvrdu formata ............................................. 23
Uklanjanje snimljenog diska ....................................................... 23
Napredno snimanje .......................................................... 24
Fleskibilno snimanje ................................................................. 24
Reproduciranje tijekom snimanja .............................................. 24
Snimanje odašiljanja s vanjske opreme ......................... 25
Snimanje mjeračem vremena na TV prijamniku ....................... 25
Snimanje s digitalnog satelitskog prijamnika ili videoopreme
– Ručno snimanje ....................................................................... 25
Snimanje mjeračem vremena s vanjskom opremom
(digitalni satelitski prijamnik) – EXT LINK ................................... 25
Napredno snimanje mjeračem vremena ........................ 26
Ručno programiranje snimanja mjeračem vremena ................... 26
Zaustavljanje snimanja koje je već započelo .............................. 27
Poništavanje stanja čekanja na snimanje na uređaju ................. 27
Snimanje s automatskim obnavljanjem ...................................... 27
Jezik digitalnog odašiljanja s više zvukova ili
više podnaslova ......................................................................... 27
Napomene u vezi sa snimanjem mjeračem vremena ............... 27
Rad u sustavu TV vodiča ............................................................ 28
Odabir programa sa željene vrste programa ili kategorije ......... 28
Traženje programa u popisu TV vodiča ...................................... 29
Korištenje gumba SHOWVIEW za snimanje mjeračem
vremena (samo za analogno odašiljanje) ................................... 30
Provjera, promjena ili brisanje programa .................................... 30
Napredna reprodukcija .................................................... 31
Radnje tijekom reprodukcije ....................................................... 31
Promjena zvuka tijekom reprodukcije ......................................... 31
Odabir snimljenih programa (naslova) za reprodukciju
– DIRECT NAVIGATOR ..................................................... 32
Promjena izgleda zaslona DIRECT NAVIGATOR ..................... 32
Razvrstavanje naslova radi lakšeg pretraživanja ....................... 32
Reprodukcija grupnih naslova ................................................... 32
Uređivanje grupe naslova .......................................................... 32
Reprodukcija naslova od početka .............................................. 32
Reprodukcija DivX-a, fotograja (JPEG) i glazbe .......... 33
Prikaz zaslona izbornika ........................................................... 33
Reprodukcija DivX videosadržaja .............................................. 33
Reprodukcija fotograja .............................................................. 35
Pokretanje reprodukcije slika u nizu ......................................... 35
Korisne funkcije tijekom reprodukcije fotograja ........................ 36
Reprodukcija glazbenih datoteka ............................................... 37
Reprodukcija glazbenog CD-a ................................................... 37
Reprodukcija glazbe snimljene na HDD-u .................................. 37
Korisne funkcije tijekom reprodukcije glazbe .............................. 38
Korisne funkcije................................................................ 39
Zaslon s IZBORNIKOM FUNKCIJA ............................................ 39
Pauziranje TV programa koji gledate
– Pauziranje TV prijenosa uživo ................................................ 39
Radnje povezane s TV prijamnikom (VIERA Link
"HDAVI ControlTM"/Q Link) ............................................. 40
Jednostavno upravljanje daljinskim upravljačem VIERA ............ 41
Uređivanje
Uređivanje naslova/poglavlja .......................................... 42
Stvaranje, uređivanje i reprodukcija popisa
za izvođenje (videozapis)................................................. 44
Uređivanje fotograja i glazbe ........................................ 46
Stvaranje, uređivanje i reprodukcija popisa
za izvođenje (slika) ........................................................... 48
Unos teksta ....................................................................... 50
Kopiranje
Kopiranje naslova ili popisa za izvođenje (videozapis) .....51
Kopiranje [Videozapis (HDD na DVD)] ....................................... 52
Kopiranje pomoću popisa za kopiranje – Napredno kopiranje ...... 53
Kopiranje naliziranog DVD-R-a, DVD-R DL-a, DVD-RW-a
(DVD-Videoformat), +R-a i +R DL-a ........................................... 54
Kopiranje videozapisa (MPEG2) s videoopreme ........................ 55
Kopiranje fotograja/popisa za izvođenje (slika) .......... 56
Kopiranje novih fotograja na USB memoriju
– Kopiranje novih slika ................................................................ 56
Kopiranje pomoću popisa za kopiranje ...................................... 56
Kopiranje fotograja na USB memoriju....................................... 57
Kopiranje glazbe na tvrdi disk......................................... 58
Kopiranje glazbe s CD-a ............................................................. 58
Kopiranje glazbe s USB memorije ili CD-R-a/CD-RW-a/
DVD-R-a/DVD-R DL-a ................................................................ 58
Postavljanje izbornika
Korištenje izbornika na zaslonu/poruke statusa ........... 60
Upravljanje HDD-om i diskom ......................................... 61
Uobičajeni postupci..................................................................... 61
Postavljanje zaštite ................................................................... 62
Brisanje svih naslova i popisa za izvođenje (videozapis)
– Brisanje svih naslova .............................................................. 62
Imenovanje diska ........................................................................ 62
Brisanje svih sadržaja – Formatiranje ....................................... 62
Odabir izgleda pozadine – Glavni izbornik ................................. 63
Odabir hoće li se prvo prikazati Glavni izbornik
– Odabir automatske reprodukcije .............................................. 63
Omogućavanje reprodukcije diskova na drugoj opremi
– Finaliziranje.............................................................................. 63
Stvaranje Glavnog izbornika – Stvori Glavni izbornik ................. 63
Promjena postavki uređaja .............................................. 64
Uobičajeni postupci..................................................................... 64
Podešavanje ............................................................................. 64
Disk ............................................................................................. 67
Slika ........................................................................................... 67
Zvuk .......................................................................................... 68
Zaslon ....................................................................................... 68
Povezivanje .............................................................................. 69
Ostalo ....................................................................................... 70
Ostale postavke ................................................................ 72
Upravljanje TV prijamnikom ...................................................... 72
Zaključavanje ............................................................................ 72
Napomene
Dodatna povezivanja ........................................................ 73
Povezivanje TV prijamnika s priključkom AUDIO/VIDEO ........... 73
Povezivanje stereopojačala ........................................................ 73
Povezivanje pojačala s priključkom za digitalni ulaz .................. 73
Povezivanje TV prijamnika i videosnimača,
digitalnog satelitskog prijamnika ................................................. 73
Često postavljena pitanja ................................................ 74
Poruke ............................................................................... 76
Vodič u slučaju problema ................................................ 78
Tehnički podaci ................................................................. 84
Rječnik pojmova ............................................................... 85
Kazalo ...........................................................Stražnje korice
Sadržaj
4
VQT3F54
Supplied accessories
Getting started
∫ Batteries
≥Insert the poles (i and j) so to match in the remote control.
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
Remote control operations (> 6)
∫ Use
The distance and angles are an approximate.
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not supplied) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of August 2011. These may be subject to change.)
∏
(N2QAYB000471)
∏ ∏ ∏
1 Remote control 1 AC mains lead
For use with this unit only. Do not
use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
1 RF coaxial cable 2 Batteries
for remote control
The remote control information
R6/LR6, AA
Remote control signal sensor
30
20
30
20
7 m directly in front of the unit
Unit care
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720AE
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
DO NOT
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 4 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
4
VQT3F54
Supplied accessories
Getting started
∫ Batteries
≥Insert the poles (i and j) so to match in the remote control.
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
Remote control operations (> 6)
∫ Use
The distance and angles are an approximate.
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not supplied) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of August 2011. These may be subject to change.)
∏
(N2QAYB000471)
∏ ∏ ∏
1 Remote control 1 AC mains lead
For use with this unit only. Do not
use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
1 RF coaxial cable 2 Batteries
for remote control
The remote control information
R6/LR6, AA
Remote control signal sensor
30
20
30
20
7 m directly in front of the unit
Unit care
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720AE
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
DO NOT
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 4 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
4
VQT3F54
Supplied accessories
Getting started
∫ Batteries
≥Insert the poles (i and j) so to match in the remote control.
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
Remote control operations (> 6)
∫ Use
The distance and angles are an approximate.
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not supplied) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of August 2011. These may be subject to change.)
∏
(N2QAYB000471)
∏ ∏ ∏
1 Remote control 1 AC mains lead
For use with this unit only. Do not
use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
1 RF coaxial cable 2 Batteries
for remote control
The remote control information
R6/LR6, AA
Remote control signal sensor
30
20
30
20
7 m directly in front of the unit
Unit care
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720AE
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
DO NOT
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 4 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
4
VQT3F54
Supplied accessories
Getting started
∫ Batteries
≥Insert the poles (i and j) so to match in the remote control.
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
Remote control operations (> 6)
∫ Use
The distance and angles are an approximate.
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not supplied) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of August 2011. These may be subject to change.)
∏
(N2QAYB000471)
∏ ∏ ∏
1 Remote control 1 AC mains lead
For use with this unit only. Do not
use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
1 RF coaxial cable 2 Batteries
for remote control
The remote control information
R6/LR6, AA
Remote control signal sensor
30
20
30
20
7 m directly in front of the unit
Unit care
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720AE
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
DO NOT
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 4 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
4
Isporučeni pribor
Provjerite i identicirajte isporučeni pribor.
(Brojevi dijelova važeći su od kolovoza 2011. Podložni su promjenama.)
R6/LR6, AA
• Koristite alkalne ili manganske baterije.
Funkcije daljinskog upravljača (→ 6)
■ Baterije
• Umetnite polove (+ i -) tako da budu u skladu s oznakama unutar
daljinskog upravljača.
■ Uporaba
Senzor signala daljinskog upravljača
(N2QAYB000471)
1 Daljinski
upravljač
1 Mrežni kabel
Koristiti samo s ovim
uređajem. Nemojte ga koristiti
s drugom opremom. Također,
s ovim uređajem nemojte
koristiti kabele drugih uređaja.
1 RF koaksijalni kabel 2 Baterije
za daljinski upravljač
7 m izravno ispred uređaja
Navedena udaljenost i kutovi su približni.
Podaci o daljinskom upravljaču
Zaštita uređaja
Na precizne dijelove ovog uređaja lako utječe okolina,
posebice temperatura, vlažnost i prašina. Dim cigarete također
može uzrokovati nepravilan rad ili kvar.
Uređaj čistite isključivo mekom suhom krpom.
• Za čišćenje ovog uređaja nikada nemojte koristiti alkohol,
razrjeđivač ili benzin.
• Pažljivo pročitajte upute za uporabu kemijski obrađene krpe prije
korištenja.
Imajte na umu sljedeće da biste neometano slušali i gledali sa
zadovoljstvom.
Prašina i prljavština mogu se vremenom zalijepiti za leću, što će
onemogućiti snimanje ili reproduciranje diskova.
Koristite čistač leća (nije isporučen) otprilike jednom godišnje,
ovisno o učestalosti korištenja i radnom okruženju. Pozorno
pročitajte upute za korištenje čistača leća prije upotrebe.
Čistač leća: RP-CL720E
• Ovaj čistač leća možda neće biti u prodaji u ovoj regiji.
Nemojte zaklanjati unutarnji ventilator za hlađenje na stražnjoj ploči.
Prije pomicanja uređaja provjerite je li ladica za disk prazna.
Ako to propustite učiniti, može doći do ozbiljnog oštećenja
diska i uređaja.
NEISPRAVNO
Uređaj nemojte stavljati na
pojačala ili opremu koja se
može zagrijati.
Toplina može oštetiti uređaj.
Napomena
Priprema
VQT3F54
5
Tvrdi disk (HDD) vrlo je precizno sredstvo za snimanje te je, zbog kapaciteta dugog snimanja i visoke brzine rada, vrlo poseban uređaj koji se
može lako oštetiti.
Osnovno je pravilo spremiti sav bitan sadržaj na disk da biste napravili zaštitnu kopiju.
■ HDD nije napravljen da bi podnio vibracije/udarce ili prašinu
Ovisno o okruženju i rukovanju HDD-om, dio se sadržaja može oštetiti pa reproduciranje i snimanje više neće biti moguće. Nemojte izlagati
uređaj vibracijama, udarcima ili isključivati mrežni kabel iz strujne utičnice, osobito dok uređaj radi. Ako dođe do nestanka struje tijekom
snimanja ili reproduciranja, sadržaj može biti oštećen.
■ Tvrdi je disk privremeni spremnik
Nije trajni spremnik za pohranu snimljenog sadržaja. Koristite tvrdi disk kao privremeni spremnik za jednokratno gledanje, uređivanje ili
kopiranje. Preporučuje se spremiti snimljeni sadržaj na disk ili zadržati izvorne podatke ili CD-e s kojih je sadržaj kopiran.
■ Odmah napravite sigurnosnu kopiju čim predvidite problem s HDD-om.
Ako se radi o nepravilnosti unutar HDD-a, može doći do ponavljajućih neobičnih zvukova ili problema sa slikom (šum blokova itd.). Korištenje
HDD-a u ovakvu stanju može pogoršati problem te uređaj, u krajnjem slučaju, može postati neupotrebljiv. Čim primijetite ovakav problem,
kopirajte sav sadržaj na disk i zatražite servisiranje. Snimljeni sadržaj (podaci) na neupotrebljivom HDD-u ne može se vratiti.
• Kada je uređaj uključen ili isključen, može se javiti neočekivani zvuk. To ne predstavlja problem s uređajem.
■ Mjere opreza prilikom postavljanja
• Nemojte smjestiti uređaj na zatvorenom prostoru gdje
su stražnji ventilator ili otvori za zrak na bočnom dijelu
pokriveni.
• Smjestite uređaj na ravnu površinu i nemojte ga izlagati
vibracijama ili udarcima.
• Nemojte stavljati uređaj na druge
uređaje koji stvaraju toplinu,
poput videosnimača itd.
• Nemojte ga stavljati na mjesto na
kojem dolazi do čestih promjena
temperature.
• Smjestite ga na mjesto na kojem ne
dolazi do kondenzacije. Kondenzacija
je pojava kada se vlaga stvara na
hladnoj površini pri velikim promjenama
temperature. Kondenzacija može
izazvati unutarnju štetu na uređaju.
• Uvjeti u kojima može doći do kondenzacije
– U slučaju velike promjene temperature (premještanje s vruće
na hladnu lokaciju ili obratno, izlaganje klimatizacijskom
uređaju ili kada hladni zrak izravno utječe na uređaj). Kada je
tvrdi disk (zagrijava se tijekom rada) izložen hladnom zraku,
može se stvoriti kondenzacija u njegovu unutrašnjem dijelu,
koja može izazvati oštećenje na glavi ili na nekom drugom
dijelu itd.
– U slučaju visoke vlažnosti ili velike količine pare u prostoriji.
– Tijekom sezone kiše.
U navedenom slučaju nemojte uključivati uređaj, ostavite ga
da se prilagodi sobnoj temperaturi i pričekajte 2 do 3 sata dok ne
nestane kondenzacija.
■ Dim cigarete i sl. uzrokuje nepravilan rad ili kvar.
Uređaj se može pokvariti ako dim cigarete ili sprej protiv kukaca/
isparavanja itd. prodre u unutrašnjost.
■ Tijekom rada
• Nemojte pomicati uređaj ili ga izlagati vibraciji ili udarcima. (HDD se
može oštetiti.)
• Nemojte vaditi mrežni kabel iz strujne utičnice ili okrenuti sklopku
osigurača.
Dok uređaj radi, HDD se okreće visokom brzinom. Zvukovi ili pokreti
koji nastaju tijekom okretanja normalna su pojava.
■ Premještanje uređaja
Isključite uređaj. (Pričekajte dok se ne pojavi pozdrav "BYE" na
zaslonu.)
Izvadite mrežni kabel iz strujne utičnice.
Pomaknite uređaj tek kad u potpunosti prestane raditi (nakon
otprilike 2 minute) da biste izbjegli izlaganje vibracijama ili udarcima.
(Čak i nakon isključivanja uređaja, HDD radi još neko vrijeme.)
■ Preostalo vrijeme snimanja tvrdog diska
Ovaj uređaj snima pomoću sustava kompresije podataka VBR (promjenjiva brzina bitova) da bi razlikovao segmente snimljenih podataka koji
odgovaraju segmentima videopodataka, što može uzrokovati razlike u prikazanoj količini vremena i prostora koje je preostalo za snimanje.
Ako je preostalo premalo vremena za snimanje, obrišite sve neželjene naslove da biste stvorili više prostora prije nego počnete snimati.
(Brisanjem popisa za izvođenje (videozapisi) nećete povećati količinu vremena.)
■ Naknada štete za snimljeni sadržaj
Panasonic ne preuzima odgovornost za štete nastale izravno ili neizravno, zbog bilo koje vrste problema, koje mogu rezultirati gubitkom
snimljenog ili obrađenog sadržaja te ne jamči za sadržaj ako funkcija snimanja ili obrade ne radi pravilno. Jednako se tako navedeno
primjenjuje u slučaju bilo kakve vrste popravka izvršenog na uređaju (uključujući i bilo koju drugu komponentu koja nije povezana s HDD-om).
Održavanje tvrdog diska (HDD-a)
5
VQT3F54
Getting started
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a Playlist
(Video) will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ Setup precautions
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
≥Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Place in an area where condensation
does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly
impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is
subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of
the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
∫ While operating
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for
a short time.)
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
This unit
VCR
DO NOT
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 5 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
Ovaj uređaj
Videosnimač
NEISPRAVNO
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1
Turn the unit on (> 10)
2
Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
<
Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
=
Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
?
Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1
Disc indicator
2
Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3
Copying indicator
4
USB port indicator
5
Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6
Timer recording indicator
7
Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8
Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9
Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
:
Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3
Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4
To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5
Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6
Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7
Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8
Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9
Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
:
Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
;
Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 31)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K Skip the specified time (> 31)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M
Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
6
VQT3F54
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (> 10)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18, 19)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 30, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching
(> 39)
6 Show digital channel information (> 16)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 31)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 32, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various
functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 31)
; Colour buttons
– for switching the Teletext function (> 17)
– for TV Guide operations (> 28)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 37)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)
– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)
– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)
– for tuning settings (> 64)
< Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 40)
= Show Teletext information (> 17)
>
Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 15, 19, 28)
A
Show S
HOWVIEW screen (> 30)
B
Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C
Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)
D
Exit the menu screen
E
Show the TV Guide screen (> 20)
F
Show FUNCTION MENU (> 39)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G
Return to previous screen
H
Create chapter (> 31)
I
Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 31)
J
Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 31)
K
Skip the specified time (> 31)
L
Show on-screen menu (> 60)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle
etc.
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
1 Disc indicator
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
STTL
STATUS
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
DELETE
PROG/CHECK
EXIT
OK
G
U
I
D
E
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
CHAPTER
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
ヵユヹヵ
Unit’s Display
HDD
DVD
REC
PLAY
D
COPY
USB EXT
-L
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
6
Vodič kroz kontrole
Daljinski upravljač
Upute o radu su općenite, za uporabu s daljinskim upravljačem.
Zaslon uređaja
Uključivanje uređaja (→ 10)
Odaberite pogon [HDD ili DVD] (→ 18, 19)
Pogon se mijenja svaki put kad pritisnete [DRIVE SELECT]
(Odabir pogona).
Odabir kanala i naslova itd./Unos brojeva
Za brisanje neželjenih snimljenih naslova, programa mjerača
vremena, fotograja ili glazbe (→ 21, 30, 47)
Osnovne radnje za snimanje i reproduciranje
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pauziranje TV programa koji gledate (→ 39)
Prikaz podataka o digitalnim kanalima (→ 16)/Informacije o programu
unutar zaslona TV vodiča (→ 28)/Prikaz poruka statusa (→ 61)
Odabir/OK, Kadar po kadar (→ 31)
Prikaz zaslona DIRECT NAVIGATOR (→ 32, 42)
Prikaz izbornika OPTION (Mogućnosti)
Pomoću gumba OPTION možete brzo i jednostavno pristupiti raznim
funkcijama (Reprodukcija slika u nizu, Postavke stanja čekanja itd.).
Odaberite zvuk (za reproduciranje i analogno odašiljanje) (→ 31)
Gumbi u boji
– za prebacivanje funkcije teleteksta (→ 17)
– za radnje TV vodiča (→ 28)
– za prebacivanje zaslona DIREKTNOG NAVIGATORA (→ 35, 37)
– za prebacivanje VIDEOZAPISA/Popisa za izvođenje (→ 53)
– za prebacivanje FOTOGRAFIJE/Popisa za izvođenje (→ 56)
– za deaktivaciju programa mjerača vremena (→ 27)
– za odabir tipova znakova pri unosu teksta (→ 50)
– za postavke podešavanja (→ 64)
Funkcije snimanja
• [● REC] Početak snimanja (→ 19)
• [REC MODE] Promjena načina snimanja (→ 19)
• [EXT LINK] Snimanje mjeračem vremena s vanjskom opremom
(→ 25)
• [● DIRECT TV REC] Izravno snimanje s TV prijamnika (→ 40)
Prikaz podataka s teleteksta (→ 17)
Odašiljanje signala daljinskog upravljača
Radnje TV prijamnika (→ 72)
Odabir kanala/Promjena stranica u sustavu TV vodiča (→ 15, 19, 28)
Prikaz zaslona SHOWVIEW (→ 30)
Odabir priključka (AV1 ili AV2) (→ 25)
Prikaz zaslona snimanja mjeračem vremena (→ 27)
Izlaz iz zaslona izbornika
Prikaz zaslona TV vodiča (→ 20)
Prikaz IZBORNIKA FUNKCIJA (→ 39)
Pomoću IZBORNIKA FUNKCIJA možete brzo i jednostavno
pristupiti glavnim funkcijama (reproduciranje, snimanje itd.).
Povratak na prethodni zaslon
Kreiraj poglavlje (→ 31)
Preskoči za otprilike 1 min unaprijed (→ 31)
Preskoči za otprilike 10 sekundi unatrag (→ 31)
Preskoči za određeno vrijeme (→ 31)
Prikaz izbornika na zaslonu (→ 60)
Izbornik za reprodukciju diska i promjenu DVB višestrukog zvuka
ili podnaslova itd.
Prikaz podnaslova (Podnaslove možete vidjeti ako program
digitalnog odašiljanja ima podnaslove.) (→ 16)
Povratna informacija daljinskog upravljača
Treperi kad se upravlja daljinskim upravljačem.
Indikator snimanja/reprodukcije
Indikator diska
Indikator digitalnog odašiljanja
Svijetli kada uređaj prima digitalno odašiljanje.
Indikator kopiranja
Indikator USB priključka
Indikator snimanja mjeračem vremena s vanjskom opremom
Indikator snimanja mjeračem vremena
Indikator pogona [HDD ili DVD]
Indikator glavnog zaslona
Indikator snimanja
Indikator
reprodukcije
Indikator snimanja/
reprodukcije
7
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 10)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (> 14)
3 USB port (> 14)
4 Unit’s Display (> 6)
5 Open/Close disc tray (> 14)
6 Channel select (> 15, 19)
7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19)
8 Stop (> 19, 31)
9 Start play (> 18)
: Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 9, 73)
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(> 68).
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front panel.
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
Video
Picture
Music
FUNCTION MENU
OK
RETURN
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Remain
30:00 SP
HDD
1
2
Select a function.
Selectable items are
displayed on the right.
Select an item.
Press [OK].
Press [OK].
1 Playback
Select when you wish to
playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc.
will be displayed.
Video (> 18, 32)
DivX (>
33)
Picture (>
35)
Music (>
37)
Top Menu (>
18)
Menu (>
18)
2 Recording
Select the recording method.
Timer Recording (> 20)
ShowView Record (>
30)
3 Delete
Select the title or file type you
wish to delete. The DELETE
Navigator screen will be
displayed.
Video (> 21)
Picture (>
47)
Music (>
47)
4 Copy
Select the copy method.
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52)
Advanced Copy (>
53)
Copy Music CD (>
58)
Copy Music (>
58)
5 TV Guide (> 20)
Select when you wish to
watch or record a
programme. The TV Guide
will be displayed.
6 Others
Select and execute a
function other than those
above, such as recording or
setting.
Playlists (> 44)
Flexible Rec (>
24)
HDD Management (>
61)
DVD Management (>
61)
Setup (>
64)
7 Drive Select
Change which drive is used.
HDD
DVD
USB
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 7 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
7
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 10)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (> 14)
3 USB port (> 14)
4 Unit’s Display (> 6)
5 Open/Close disc tray (> 14)
6 Channel select (> 15, 19)
7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19)
8 Stop (> 19, 31)
9 Start play (> 18)
: Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 9, 73)
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(> 68).
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front panel.
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
Video
Picture
Music
FUNCTION MENU
OK
RETURN
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Remain
30:00 SP
HDD
1
2
Select a function.
Selectable items are
displayed on the right.
Select an item.
Press [OK].
Press [OK].
1 Playback
Select when you wish to
playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc.
will be displayed.
Video (> 18, 32)
DivX (>
33)
Picture (>
35)
Music (>
37)
Top Menu (>
18)
Menu (>
18)
2 Recording
Select the recording method.
Timer Recording (> 20)
ShowView Record (>
30)
3 Delete
Select the title or file type you
wish to delete. The DELETE
Navigator screen will be
displayed.
Video (> 21)
Picture (>
47)
Music (>
47)
4 Copy
Select the copy method.
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52)
Advanced Copy (>
53)
Copy Music CD (>
58)
Copy Music (>
58)
5 TV Guide (> 20)
Select when you wish to
watch or record a
programme. The TV Guide
will be displayed.
6 Others
Select and execute a
function other than those
above, such as recording or
setting.
Playlists (> 44)
Flexible Rec (>
24)
HDD Management (>
61)
DVD Management (>
61)
Setup (>
64)
7 Drive Select
Change which drive is used.
HDD
DVD
USB
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 7 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
7
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
1
Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 10)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (> 14)
3 USB port (> 14)
4 Unit’s Display (> 6)
5 Open/Close disc tray (> 14)
6 Channel select (> 15, 19)
7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19)
8 Stop (> 19, 31)
9 Start play (> 18)
: Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 9, 73)
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(> 68).
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front panel.
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
Video
Picture
Music
FUNCTION MENU
OK
RETURN
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Remain
30:00 SP
HDD
1
2
Select a function.
Selectable items are
displayed on the right.
Select an item.
Press [OK].
Press [OK].
1 Playback
Select when you wish to
playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc.
will be displayed.
Video (> 18, 32)
DivX (>
33)
Picture (>
35)
Music (>
37)
Top Menu (>
18)
Menu (>
18)
2 Recording
Select the recording method.
Timer Recording (> 20)
ShowView Record (>
30)
3 Delete
Select the title or file type you
wish to delete. The DELETE
Navigator screen will be
displayed.
Video (> 21)
Picture (>
47)
Music (>
47)
4 Copy
Select the copy method.
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52)
Advanced Copy (>
53)
Copy Music CD (>
58)
Copy Music (>
58)
5 TV Guide (> 20)
Select when you wish to
watch or record a
programme. The TV Guide
will be displayed.
6 Others
Select and execute a
function other than those
above, such as recording or
setting.
Playlists (> 44)
Flexible Rec (>
24)
HDD Management (>
61)
DVD Management (>
61)
Setup (>
64)
7 Drive Select
Change which drive is used.
HDD
DVD
USB
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 7 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
7
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 10)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (> 14)
3 USB port (> 14)
4 Unit’s Display (> 6)
5 Open/Close disc tray (> 14)
6
Channel select (> 15, 19)
7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19)
8 Stop (> 19, 31)
9 Start play (> 18)
: Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 9, 73)
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(> 68).
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front panel.
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
Video
Picture
Music
FUNCTION MENU
OK
RETURN
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Remain
30:00 SP
HDD
1
2
Select a function.
Selectable items are
displayed on the right.
Select an item.
Press [OK].
Press [OK].
1 Playback
Select when you wish to
playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc.
will be displayed.
Video (> 18, 32)
DivX (>
33)
Picture (>
35)
Music (>
37)
Top Menu (>
18)
Menu (>
18)
2 Recording
Select the recording method.
Timer Recording (> 20)
ShowView Record (>
30)
3 Delete
Select the title or file type you
wish to delete. The DELETE
Navigator screen will be
displayed.
Video (> 21)
Picture (>
47)
Music (>
47)
4 Copy
Select the copy method.
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52)
Advanced Copy (>
53)
Copy Music CD (>
58)
Copy Music (>
58)
5 TV Guide (> 20)
Select when you wish to
watch or record a
programme. The TV Guide
will be displayed.
6 Others
Select and execute a
function other than those
above, such as recording or
setting.
Playlists (> 44)
Flexible Rec (>
24)
HDD Management (>
61)
DVD Management (>
61)
Setup (>
64)
7 Drive Select
Change which drive is used.
HDD
DVD
USB
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 7 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
7
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 10)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2
Disc tray (> 14)
3
USB port (> 14)
4
Unit’s Display (> 6)
5
Open/Close disc tray (> 14)
6 Channel select (> 15, 19)
7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19)
8 Stop (> 19, 31)
9 Start play (> 18)
: Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 9, 73)
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(> 68).
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front panel.
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
Video
Picture
Music
FUNCTION MENU
OK
RETURN
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Remain
30:00 SP
HDD
1
2
Select a function.
Selectable items are
displayed on the right.
Select an item.
Press [OK].
Press [OK].
1 Playback
Select when you wish to
playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc.
will be displayed.
Video (> 18, 32)
DivX (>
33)
Picture (>
35)
Music (>
37)
Top Menu (>
18)
Menu (>
18)
2 Recording
Select the recording method.
Timer Recording (> 20)
ShowView Record (>
30)
3 Delete
Select the title or file type you
wish to delete. The DELETE
Navigator screen will be
displayed.
Video (> 21)
Picture (>
47)
Music (>
47)
4 Copy
Select the copy method.
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52)
Advanced Copy (>
53)
Copy Music CD (>
58)
Copy Music (>
58)
5 TV Guide (> 20)
Select when you wish to
watch or record a
programme. The TV Guide
will be displayed.
6 Others
Select and execute a
function other than those
above, such as recording or
setting.
Playlists (> 44)
Flexible Rec (>
24)
HDD Management (>
61)
DVD Management (>
61)
Setup (>
64)
7 Drive Select
Change which drive is used.
HDD
DVD
USB
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 7 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
7
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 10)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (> 14)
3 USB port (> 14)
4 Unit’s Display (> 6)
5 Open/Close disc tray (> 14)
6 Channel select (> 15, 19)
7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19)
8
Stop (> 19, 31)
9
Start play (> 18)
:
Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 9, 73)
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(> 68).
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front panel.
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
Video
Picture
Music
FUNCTION MENU
OK
RETURN
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Remain
30:00 SP
HDD
1
2
Select a function.
Selectable items are
displayed on the right.
Select an item.
Press [OK].
Press [OK].
1 Playback
Select when you wish to
playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc.
will be displayed.
Video (> 18, 32)
DivX (>
33)
Picture (>
35)
Music (>
37)
Top Menu (>
18)
Menu (>
18)
2 Recording
Select the recording method.
Timer Recording (> 20)
ShowView Record (>
30)
3 Delete
Select the title or file type you
wish to delete. The DELETE
Navigator screen will be
displayed.
Video (> 21)
Picture (>
47)
Music (>
47)
4 Copy
Select the copy method.
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52)
Advanced Copy (>
53)
Copy Music CD (>
58)
Copy Music (>
58)
5 TV Guide (> 20)
Select when you wish to
watch or record a
programme. The TV Guide
will be displayed.
6 Others
Select and execute a
function other than those
above, such as recording or
setting.
Playlists (> 44)
Flexible Rec (>
24)
HDD Management (>
61)
DVD Management (>
61)
Setup (>
64)
7 Drive Select
Change which drive is used.
HDD
DVD
USB
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 7 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
7
Brzi vodič
Lagano povucite da biste
otvorili prednju ploču.
Odaberite funkciju.
Stavke koje se mogu
odabrati prikazane su
desno.
Pritisnite [OK].
Pritisnite [OK].
Odaberite stavku.
Tipka za stanje čekanja/uključivanje ( /I) (→ 10)
Pritisnite da biste uključili uređaj iz stanja čekanja ili obrnuto. U
stanju čekanja uređaj i dalje troši malu količinu energije.
Ladica za disk (→ 14)
USB ulaz (→ 14)
Zaslon uređaja (→ 6)
Otvaranje/zatvaranje ladice za disk (→ 14)
Odabir kanala (→ 15, 19)
Početak snimanja (→ 19)/Odredite vrijeme prestanka snimanja
(→ 19)
Zaustavljanje (→ 19, 31)
Pokretanje reprodukcije (→ 18)
Senzor signala daljinskog upravljača
Priključci na stražnjoj ploči (→ 8, 9, 73)
Reprodukcija
Odaberite kad želite
reproducirati sadržaj.
Prikazat će se zaslon
DIRECT NAVIGATOR ili
zaslon izbornika itd.
Videozapis (→ 18, 32)
DivX (→ 33)
Slika (→ 35)
Glazba (→ 37)
Glavni izbornik (→ 18)
Izbornik (→ 18)
Snimanje
Odaberite metodu snimanja.
Snimanje mjeračem vremena
(→ 20)
Snimanje ShowView (→ 30)
Brisanje
Odaberite naslov ili tip
datoteke koji želite izbrisati.
Prikazat će se DELETE
(Brisati) na zaslonu
Navigatora.
Videozapis (→ 21)
Slika (→ 47)
Glazba (→ 47)
Kopiranje
Odaberite metodu kopiranja.
Videozapis (HDD u DVD) (→ 52)
Napredno kopiranje (→ 53)
Kopiranje glazbenog CD-a
(→ 58)
Kopiranje glazbe (→ 58)
TV vodič (→ 20)
Odaberite kada želite gledati
ili snimiti program. Prikazat
će se TV vodič.
Ostalo
Odaberite i izvršite neku
drugu funkciju, kao što je
snimanje ili postavljanje.
Popisi izvođenja (→ 44)
Fleksibilno snimanje (→ 24)
Upravljanje HDD-om (→ 61)
Upravljanje DVD-om (→ 61)
Postavljanje (→ 64)
Odabir pogona
Promijenite pogon koji se
koristi.
Tvrdi disk
DVD
USB
Ako ne želite da se prikaže IZBORNIK FUNKCIJA kad uključujete
uređaj, postavite "Zaslon s IZBORNIKOM FUNKCIJA" na "Isklj." u
Izborniku za postavljanje (→ 68).
Glavni uređaj
Brzi pristup raznim funkcijama – Zaslon s IZBORNIKOM FUNKCIJA
"IZBORNIK FUNKCIJA" automatski se pojavljuje kada uključite uređaj. (Kada je "Zaslon s IZBORNIKOM FUNKCIJA" postavljen na "Uklj." u
Izborniku za postavljanje) Možete pristupiti glavnoj funkciji brzo i jednostavno.
Napomena
8
VQT3F54
STEP 1 Connection
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–B. Confirm connections not listed below with your
dealer.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 73) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
Using a 21-pin Scart cable
≥You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 40).
≥You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (> 86).
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 69)
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)]
A
Connecting a television
Required setting
B
Connecting a television and digital satellite receiver
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
PCM/BITSTREAM
)
RF
IN
RF
OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L
AV1
(
TV
)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
(
EXT
)
AC IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
4
3
2
1 2
To the aerial Television’s rear panel
Aerial
cable
RF coaxial
cable
(supplied)
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
AC mains lead
(supplied)
Connect only after all other connections
are complete.
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(> 9, 73)
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
PCM/BITSTREAM
)
RF
IN
RF
OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L
AV1
(
TV
)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
(
EXT
)
AC IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
5
3
2
1 2
4
AV
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
Aerial
cable
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
AC mains lead
(supplied)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Digital satellite receiver’s
rear panel
21-pin Scart cable
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the
Setup menu (> 70)
Required setting
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(>
9, 73)
RF coaxial cable
(supplied)
Connect the unit directly to the
television
If you connect the unit through an AV
selector or video cassette recorder to the
television, video signal will be affected by
copyright protection systems and the
picture may not be shown correctly.
Television
VCR
This unit
DO NOT
≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are
both television and VCR input terminals.
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 8 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
8
VQT3F54
STEP 1 Connection
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–B. Confirm connections not listed below with your
dealer.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 73) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
Using a 21-pin Scart cable
≥You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 40).
≥You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (> 86).
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 69)
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)]
A
Connecting a television
Required setting
B
Connecting a television and digital satellite receiver
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
PCM/BITSTREAM
)
RF
IN
RF
OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L
AV1
(
TV
)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
(
EXT
)
AC IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
4
3
2
1 2
To the aerial Television’s rear panel
Aerial
cable
RF coaxial
cable
(supplied)
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
AC mains lead
(supplied)
Connect only after all other connections
are complete.
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(> 9, 73)
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
PCM/BITSTREAM
)
RF
IN
RF
OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L
AV1
(
TV
)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
(
EXT
)
AC IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
5
3
2
1 2
4
AV
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
Aerial
cable
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
AC mains lead
(supplied)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Digital satellite receiver’s
rear panel
21-pin Scart cable
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the
Setup menu (> 70)
Required setting
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(>
9, 73)
RF coaxial cable
(supplied)
Connect the unit directly to the
television
If you connect the unit through an AV
selector or video cassette recorder to the
television, video signal will be affected by
copyright protection systems and the
picture may not be shown correctly.
Television
VCR
This unit
DO NOT
≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are
both television and VCR input terminals.
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 8 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
8
1. KORAK Povezivanje
Pomoću scart kabela s 21 pinom
• Možete koristiti razne funkcije Q Linka povezivanjem uređaja na kompatibilan Q Link TV prijamnik (→ 40).
• Možete uživati u visokokvalitetnom gledanju povezivanjem uređaja na RGB kompatibilni TV prijamnik (→ 86).
“AV1 Izlaz” u Izborniku za postavljanje (→ 69)
• Prije povezivanja isključite svu opremu i pročitajte odgovarajuće upute za uporabu.
• Odaberite uzorak povezivanja A ili B u skladu sa svojim okruženjem.. Provjerite povezivanje koje nije navedeno u nastavku sa svojim
dobavljačem.
• Pogledajte poglavlje "Dodatna povezivanja" (→ 73) za povezivanje pomoću drugih priključaka i povezivanje s drugom opremom.
Ako uređaj ne namjeravate upotrebljavati dulje vrijeme
Da biste uštedjeli energiju, isključite ga iz strujne utičnice. Ovaj uređaj troši malu količinu energije, čak i kada je isključen [otprilike 0,3 W
(Aktivira se “Štednja energije u stanju čekanja” i “RF OUT (antenski signal)” postavljen je na “Isklj.”.)]
A Povezivanje TV prijamnika
B Povezivanje TV prijamnika i digitalnog satelitskog prijamnika
TV
prijamnik
Uređaj
Videosnimač
NEISPRAVNO
Stražnja ploča televizora
Potrebna postavka
Stražnja ploča televizora
Na antenu
Na antenu
U strujnu utičnicu
(AC 220 V do 240 V, 50 Hz)
U strujnu utičnicu
(AC 220 V do 240 V, 50 Hz)
Mrežni kabel
(isporučen)
Povežite samo nakon što su završena
sva druga povezivanja.
Mrežni kabel
(isporučen)
Povežite samo nakon što su
završena sva druga povezivanja.
Povežite uređaj izravno na TV prijamnik
Ako uređaj povežete pomoću AV selektora ili
videosnimača na TV prijamnik, na videosignal
će utjecati sustavi zaštite autorskih prava i
slika možda neće biti dobro prikazana.
• Povezivanje TV prijamnika s ugrađenim videosnimačem
Povežite ulazne priključke na TV prijamniku ako postoje
ulazni priključci i za TV prijamnik i za videosnimač.
Postavke za “AV2 priključak” i “AV2 povezivanje” u
Izborniku za postavljanje (→ 70)
Povezivanje priključka koji
nije priključak za scart kabel s
21 pinom (→ 9, 73)
Povezivanje priključka koji
nije priključak za scart kabel s
21 pinom (→ 9, 73)
Ventilator
Ventilator
Potpuno ožičen scart
kabel s 21 pinom
Potpuno ožičen scart
kabel s 21 pinom
Stražnja ploča ovog uređaja
Stražnja ploča ovog uređaja
Scart kabel s 21 pinom
Kabel
antene
Kabel
antene
RF koaksijalni
kabel
(isporučen)
RF koaksijalni
kabel
(isporučen)
Stražnja ploča digitalnog
satelitskog prijamnika
Potrebna postavka
9
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection between this unit and your TV.
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMI
TM
(Deep Colour) technology.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 85) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be
output.)
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI Control
TM
” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[> 40, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control
TM
”/Q Link)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
PCM/BITSTREAM
)
RF
IN
RF
OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L
AV1
(
TV
)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
(
EXT
)
AV
AV
HDMI IN
HDMI AV OUT
Fully wired
21-pin Scart cable
21-pin Scart cable
This unit’s rear panel
HDMI cable
Television’s rear panel
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the
following functions are available.
≥Download from the TV (> 40)
≥Direct TV Recording (> 40)
≥Watching pictures from digital satellite
receiver
(In this case, make sure to switch the
television input to “AV”.)
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”
(> 69).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
Required setting
Digital satellite receiver’s rear
panel
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
PCM/BITSTREAM
)
RF
IN
RF
OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L
AV1
(
TV
)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
(
EXT
)
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
AV
HDMI AV OUT
This unit’s rear panel
HDMI cable
HDMI cable
Fully wired
21-pin Scart cable
Television’s rear panel
Receiver’s rear
panel
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 9 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
9
Brzi vodič
Možete uživati u visokokvalitetnoj slici dodavanjem HDMI spoja na spoj scart kabela s 21 pinom između ovog uređaja i svog TV prijamnika.
Povezivanje na TV prijamnik HDMI (engl. High Denition Multimedia Interface;
Multimedijsko sučelje visoke razlučivosti) kabelom
Kada je povezan na uređaj koji podržava HDMI, prenose se nekomprimirani digitalni audiosignal i videosignal. Možete uživati u
visokokvalitetnom digitalnom videozapisu i zvuku koristeći samo 1 kabel. Kada povezujete na HDTV (TV prijamnik visoke razlučivosti) koji
podržava HDMI, izlaz može biti prebačen na 1080p, 1080i ili 720p HD videozapis.
• Ovaj uređaj sadržava tehnologiju HDMI™ (s tehnologijom Deep Colour).
• Videoizvori prebačeni na razlučivost 1920 x 1080 visoke kvalitete proizvodit će nešto manju razlučivost slike od pravih 1080p full-HD izvora. O
pojedinostima se raspitajte kod prodavača.
• Koristite HDMI kabele visoke brzine koji imaju HDMI logotip (kako je prikazano na koricama priručnika).
• Pri postavljanju videoizlaza na "1080p" koristite HDMI kabele duljine 5 metara ili manje.
Funkcija VIERA Link „HDAVI Control™”
Kada povezujete s Panasonicovim TV prijamnikom (VIERA) ili prijamnikom opremljenim funkcijom "HDAVI Control", bit će moguće povezane
funkcije. [→ 40, Radnje povezane s TV prijamnikom (VIERA Link "HDAVI ControTM"/Q Link)]
• Ne mogu se koristiti kabeli koji nisu kompatibilni s tehnologijom HDMI.
• Preporučuje se uporaba Panasonicovih HDMI kabela.
Preporučeni kataloški broj dijela:
RP-CDHS15 (1,5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3,0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5,0 m) itd.
Spajanje s TV prijamnikom i prijamnikom koji podržavaju HDMI
Povezivanje s Panasonicovim TV
prijamnikom (VIERA)
Ako je povezan scart kabel s 21 pinom,
dostupne su sljedeće funkcije:
• Preuzimanje s TV prijamnika (→ 40)
• Izravno snimanje s TV prijamnika (→ 40)
• Gledanje slika s digitalnog satelitskog
prijamnika
(U tom slučaju, prebacite priključak TV
prijamnika na "AV").
• Ako povezujete s TV prijamnikom koji podržava samo 2-kanalni audioizlaz, zvuk s 3 kanala ili više bit će pomiješan (→ 85) i emitiran kroz 2
kanala, čak i kada povezujete HDMI kabelom. (Neki se diskovi ne mogu miješati.)
• Ne možete povezati ovaj uređaj na DVI uređaje koji ne podržavaju HDCP.
Za uređaje koji podržavaju zaštitu autorskih prava HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection), opremljene digitalnim DVI ulaznim
priključkom (monitori računala itd.):
Ovisno o uređaju, slike možda neće biti dobro prikazane ili neće biti uopće prikazane kada se povezuje DVI/HDMI kabelom. (Zvuk se ne može
reproducirati.)
• Funkciju "Digitalni audioizlaz" postavite na "HDMI
i Optički" (→ 69).
(Zadana postavka je „HDMI i optički”.)
Stražnja ploča ovog uređaja
Stražnja ploča ovog uređaja
Stražnja ploča
televizora
Stražnja ploča televizora
Stražnja ploča digitalnog
satelitskog prijamnika
Stražnja ploča
prijamnika
HDMI kabel
HDMI kabel
HDMI kabel
Scart kabel s 21 pinom
Potpuno ožičen
scart kabel s 21
pinom
Potpuno ožičen
scart kabel s 21
pinom
Potrebna postavka
Napomena
10
VQT3F54
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link or Q
Link functions (> 40), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
The language or country may be selected automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital &
Analogue channels” or “Digital
channels” and press [OK].
≥Digital & Analogue channels:
Perform the analogue Auto-Setup and the DVB Auto
Setup.
≥Digital channels:
Perform the DVB Auto Setup. (Analogue Auto-Setup is not
performed)
Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital and analogue
channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for
use.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥When the channel could not be received properly, adjust
the position and direction of the aerial.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the
“Power Save in Standby” setting
menu appears.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the
Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the
television.
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
RETURN
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
Language
Polski
OK
RETURN
SELECT
English
Česky
Magyar
Slovenčina
Русский
Country
Polska
Magyarország
Slovensko
Others (CCIR)
Others (OIRT)
Auto Setup
Digital & Analogue channels
Digital channels
DVB Auto Setup
Scan 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1
2
TV
Data
9
9
CH
Digital channel setup
screen
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
On Timer:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
Power Save in Standby Activated (
On
/
On Timer
)
§1
Deactivated
(
Off
)
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
§3
Approx. 14 W
Startup time Not Quick
Quick
§2
Watching the picture
(e.g. Pay TV) from the
device connected to AV2
Cannot do Can do
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly
> 65, Signal Condition (Digital broadcast)
> 66, Manual Tuning (Analogue broadcast)
∫ To restart set up
> 64, Auto Setup Restart
Auto Setup
CH 1
Analogue Auto Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
Analogue channel setup
screen
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
b di bli Q i k S f i d
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
10
2. KORAK Postavke prijma kanala i formata TV prijamnika
Pogledati “Prelazak zemaljskih odašiljanja na digitalni
signal” (→ 86).
1 Uključite TV prijamnik i odaberite
odgovarajući AV priključak koji će
odgovarati priključcima na ovom uređaju.
2 Pritisnite [ ] da biste uključili uređaj.
Pri spajanju s TV prijamnikom koji ima funkcije VIERA Link ili
Q Link (→ 40) počinje preuzimanje s TV prijamnika. Možete
preuzeti položaje podešenja s TV prijamnika za kanale koji
su pokriveni ovim uređajem. Jezik i zemlja mogu se odabrati
automatski.
3 Pritisnite [▲, ▼] za odabir jezika i
pritisnite [OK].
4 Pritisnite [▲,▼] da biste odabrali
zemlju i pritisnite [OK].
5 Pritisnite [▲,▼] da biste odabrali
"Digitalni & analogni kanali" ili
"Digitalni kanali" i pritisnite [OK].
• Digitalni i analogni kanali:
Izvršite analogno automatsko postavljanje i DVB
automatsko postavljanje.
• Digitalni kanali:
Izvršite DVB automatsko postavljanje. (Analogno se
automatsko postavljanje ne izvodi)
Automatsko postavljanje započinje.
Uređaj će tražiti zemaljske digitalne i analogne kanale. TV
kanali bit će smješteni i spremljeni, spremni za korištenje.
To će trajati otprilike 5 minuta.
• Ako kanal nije ispravno primljen, podesite položaj i smjer
antene.
6 Pritisnite [▲,▼] da biste odabrali
“Uklj.”, “Isklj.” ili “Po mjeraču vremena”
i pritisnite [OK] kada se pojavi izbornik
"Ušteda energije u stanju čekanja".
Kada se pojavi slika na TV prijamniku, postavljanje je završeno.
Zaustavljanje napola
Pritisnite [RETURN ].
■ Ako se prikaže izbornik s postavkama sata
Ručno postavite sat (→ 70).
■ Potvrda da su stanice podešene
→ 65, Stanje signala (digitalno odašiljanje)
→ 66, Ručno podešavanje (analogno odašiljanje)
■ Ponovno pokretanje postavljanja
→ 64, Ponovno pokretanje automatskog postavljanja
Uklj.: Prijeći će u značajku štednje energije u načinu
čekanja kad je uređaj u stanju čekanja.
Isklj.: Moguće je brzo pokretanje iz načina stanja
čekanja. (Način brzog pokretanja)
Po mjeraču vremena:
Pritisnite [▲,▼, ◄,►] da biste postavili vrijeme
početka i završetka i potom pritisnite [OK].
• "Ušteda energije u stanju čekanja" postavljena
je da se aktivira tijekom razdoblja postavljanja.
Značajke funkcije Ušteda energije u stanju čekanja su sljedeće:
Ušteda energije u
stanju čekanja
Aktivirana
(Uklj./Po
mjeraču
vremena)*
1
Deaktivirana
(Isklj.)
Potrošnja energije Otprilike 0,3 W*
3
Otprilike 14 W
Vrijeme pokretanja Nije brzo Brzo*
2
Gledanje slike (npr. kanali
koji se plaćaju) s uređaja
povezanog na AV2
Ne može Može
*1 "Zaslon uređaja” postavljen je na "Automatski" u
Izborniku za postavljanje. (→ 68)
*2 Moguće je pokrenuti uređaj i početi snimanje u nekoliko
sekundi.
– Ovisno o vrsti TV-a ili povezanog priključka moglo bi
proći neko vrijeme dok se ne prikaže zaslon.
*3 Kada je "RF OUT (Antenski signal)" postavljen na "Isklj."
u Izborniku za postavljanje (→ 71)
Ako se postavke formata slike TV prijamnika pojave na
TV prijamniku.
Pritisnite [▲,▼] da biste odabrali format slike TV
prijamnika i pritisnite [OK].
• 16:9:
Kada spajate na TV zaslon formata 16:9
• Pan & Scan:
Kada spajate na TV prijamnik formata
zaslona 4:3, slika sa strane je odrezana na
sliku formata 16:9 (→ 85).
• Letterbox:
Kada povezujete na TV prijamnik formata
zaslona 4:3. Slika formata 16:9 prikazana je u stilu
letterbox (→ 85).
▲,▼,◄,►
U redu
RETURN
(Povratak)
Zaslon postavki za
digitalne kanale
Zaslon za postavljanje
analognog kanala
10
VQT3F54
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link or Q
Link functions (> 40), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
The language or country may be selected automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital &
Analogue channels” or “Digital
channels” and press [OK].
≥Digital & Analogue channels:
Perform the analogue Auto-Setup and the DVB Auto
Setup.
≥Digital channels:
Perform the DVB Auto Setup. (Analogue Auto-Setup is not
performed)
Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital and analogue
channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for
use.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥When the channel could not be received properly, adjust
the position and direction of the aerial.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the
“Power Save in Standby” setting
menu appears.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the
Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the
television.
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
RETURN
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
Language
Polski
OK
RETURN
SELECT
English
Česky
Magyar
Slovenčina
Русский
Country
Polska
Magyarország
Slovensko
Others (CCIR)
Others (OIRT)
Auto Setup
Digital & Analogue channels
Digital channels
DVB Auto Setup
Scan 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1
2
TV
Data
9
9
CH
Digital channel setup
screen
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
On Timer:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
Power Save in Standby Activated (
On
/
On Timer
)
§1
Deactivated
(
Off
)
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
§3
Approx. 14 W
Startup time Not Quick
Quick
§2
Watching the picture
(e.g. Pay TV) from the
device connected to AV2
Cannot do Can do
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly
> 65, Signal Condition (Digital broadcast)
> 66, Manual Tuning (Analogue broadcast)
∫ To restart set up
> 64, Auto Setup Restart
Auto Setup
CH 1
Analogue Auto Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
Analogue channel setup
screen
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
b di bli Q i k S f i d
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
10
VQT3F54
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link or Q
Link functions (> 40), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
The language or country may be selected automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital &
Analogue channels” or “Digital
channels” and press [OK].
≥Digital & Analogue channels:
Perform the analogue Auto-Setup and the DVB Auto
Setup.
≥Digital channels:
Perform the DVB Auto Setup. (Analogue Auto-Setup is not
performed)
Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital and analogue
channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for
use.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥When the channel could not be received properly, adjust
the position and direction of the aerial.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the
“Power Save in Standby” setting
menu appears.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the
Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the
television.
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
RETURN
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
Language
Polski
OK
RETURN
SELECT
English
Česky
Magyar
Slovenčina
Русский
Country
Polska
Magyarország
Slovensko
Others (CCIR)
Others (OIRT)
Auto Setup
Digital & Analogue channels
Digital channels
DVB Auto Setup
Scan 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1
2
TV
Data
9
9
CH
Digital channel setup
screen
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
On Timer:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
Power Save in Standby Activated (
On
/
On Timer
)
§1
Deactivated
(
Off
)
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
§3
Approx. 14 W
Startup time Not Quick
Quick
§2
Watching the picture
(e.g. Pay TV) from the
device connected to AV2
Cannot do Can do
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly
> 65, Signal Condition (Digital broadcast)
> 66, Manual Tuning (Analogue broadcast)
∫ To restart set up
> 64, Auto Setup Restart
Auto Setup
CH 1
Analogue Auto Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
Analogue channel setup
screen
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
b di bli Q i k S f i d
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
10
VQT3F54
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link or Q
Link functions (> 40), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
The language or country may be selected automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital &
Analogue channels” or “Digital
channels” and press [OK].
≥Digital & Analogue channels:
Perform the analogue Auto-Setup and the DVB Auto
Setup.
≥Digital channels:
Perform the DVB Auto Setup. (Analogue Auto-Setup is not
performed)
Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital and analogue
channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for
use.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥When the channel could not be received properly, adjust
the position and direction of the aerial.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the
“Power Save in Standby” setting
menu appears.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the
Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the
television.
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
RETURN
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
Language
Polski
OK
RETURN
SELECT
English
Česky
Magyar
Slovenčina
Русский
Country
Polska
Magyarország
Slovensko
Others (CCIR)
Others (OIRT)
Auto Setup
Digital & Analogue channels
Digital channels
DVB Auto Setup
Scan 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1
2
TV
Data
9
9
CH
Digital channel setup
screen
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
On Timer:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
Power Save in Standby Activated (
On
/
On Timer
)
§1
Deactivated
(
Off
)
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
§3
Approx. 14 W
Startup time Not Quick
Quick
§2
Watching the picture
(e.g. Pay TV) from the
device connected to AV2
Cannot do Can do
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly
> 65, Signal Condition (Digital broadcast)
> 66, Manual Tuning (Analogue broadcast)
∫ To restart set up
> 64, Auto Setup Restart
Auto Setup
CH 1
Analogue Auto Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
Analogue channel setup
screen
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
b di bli Q i k S f i d
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
10
VQT3F54
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link or Q
Link functions (> 40), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
The language or country may be selected automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital &
Analogue channels” or “Digital
channels” and press [OK].
≥Digital & Analogue channels:
Perform the analogue Auto-Setup and the DVB Auto
Setup.
≥Digital channels:
Perform the DVB Auto Setup. (Analogue Auto-Setup is not
performed)
Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital and analogue
channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for
use.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥When the channel could not be received properly, adjust
the position and direction of the aerial.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the
“Power Save in Standby” setting
menu appears.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the
Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the
television.
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
RETURN
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
Language
Polski
OK
RETURN
SELECT
English
Česky
Magyar
Slovenčina
Русский
Country
Polska
Magyarország
Slovensko
Others (CCIR)
Others (OIRT)
Auto Setup
Digital & Analogue channels
Digital channels
DVB Auto Setup
Scan 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1
2
TV
Data
9
9
CH
Digital channel setup
screen
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
On Timer:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
Power Save in Standby Activated (
On
/
On Timer
)
§1
Deactivated
(
Off
)
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
§3
Approx. 14 W
Startup time Not Quick
Quick
§2
Watching the picture
(e.g. Pay TV) from the
device connected to AV2
Cannot do Can do
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly
> 65, Signal Condition (Digital broadcast)
> 66, Manual Tuning (Analogue broadcast)
∫ To restart set up
> 64, Auto Setup Restart
Auto Setup
CH 1
Analogue Auto Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
Analogue channel setup
screen
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
b di bli Q i k S f i d
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
10
VQT3F54
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link or Q
Link functions (> 40), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
The language or country may be selected automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital &
Analogue channels” or “Digital
channels” and press [OK].
≥Digital & Analogue channels:
Perform the analogue Auto-Setup and the DVB Auto
Setup.
≥Digital channels:
Perform the DVB Auto Setup. (Analogue Auto-Setup is not
performed)
Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital and analogue
channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for
use.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥When the channel could not be received properly, adjust
the position and direction of the aerial.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the
“Power Save in Standby” setting
menu appears.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the
Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the
television.
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
RETURN
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
Language
Polski
OK
RETURN
SELECT
English
Česky
Magyar
Slovenčina
Русский
Country
Polska
Magyarország
Slovensko
Others (CCIR)
Others (OIRT)
Auto Setup
Digital & Analogue channels
Digital channels
DVB Auto Setup
Scan 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1
2
TV
Data
9
9
CH
Digital channel setup
screen
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
On Timer:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
Power Save in Standby Activated (
On
/
On Timer
)
§1
Deactivated
(
Off
)
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
§3
Approx. 14 W
Startup time Not Quick
Quick
§2
Watching the picture
(e.g. Pay TV) from the
device connected to AV2
Cannot do Can do
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly
> 65, Signal Condition (Digital broadcast)
> 66, Manual Tuning (Analogue broadcast)
∫ To restart set up
> 64, Auto Setup Restart
Auto Setup
CH 1
Analogue Auto Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
Analogue channel setup
screen
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
b di bli Q i k S f i d
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
10
VQT3F54
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link or Q
Link functions (> 40), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
The language or country may be selected automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital &
Analogue channels” or “Digital
channels” and press [OK].
≥Digital & Analogue channels:
Perform the analogue Auto-Setup and the DVB Auto
Setup.
≥Digital channels:
Perform the DVB Auto Setup. (Analogue Auto-Setup is not
performed)
Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital and analogue
channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for
use.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥When the channel could not be received properly, adjust
the position and direction of the aerial.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the
“Power Save in Standby” setting
menu appears.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the
Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the
television.
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
RETURN
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
Language
Polski
OK
RETURN
SELECT
English
Česky
Magyar
Slovenčina
Русский
Country
Polska
Magyarország
Slovensko
Others (CCIR)
Others (OIRT)
Auto Setup
Digital & Analogue channels
Digital channels
DVB Auto Setup
Scan 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1
2
TV
Data
9
9
CH
Digital channel setup
screen
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
On Timer:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
Power Save in Standby Activated (
On
/
On Timer
)
§1
Deactivated
(
Off
)
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
§3
Approx. 14 W
Startup time Not Quick
Quick
§2
Watching the picture
(e.g. Pay TV) from the
device connected to AV2
Cannot do Can do
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly
> 65, Signal Condition (Digital broadcast)
> 66, Manual Tuning (Analogue broadcast)
∫ To restart set up
> 64, Auto Setup Restart
Auto Setup
CH 1
Analogue Auto Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
Analogue channel setup
screen
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
b di bli Q i k S f i d
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
10
VQT3F54
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link or Q
Link functions (> 40), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
The language or country may be selected automatically.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the country and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital &
Analogue channels” or “Digital
channels” and press [OK].
≥Digital & Analogue channels:
Perform the analogue Auto-Setup and the DVB Auto
Setup.
≥Digital channels:
Perform the DVB Auto Setup. (Analogue Auto-Setup is not
performed)
Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital and analogue
channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for
use.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥When the channel could not be received properly, adjust
the position and direction of the aerial.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the
“Power Save in Standby” setting
menu appears.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal,
it may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the
Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the
television.
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
RETURN
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
Language
Polski
OK
RETURN
SELECT
English
Česky
Magyar
Slovenčina
Русский
Country
Polska
Magyarország
Slovensko
Others (CCIR)
Others (OIRT)
Auto Setup
Digital & Analogue channels
Digital channels
DVB Auto Setup
Scan 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1
2
TV
Data
9
9
CH
Digital channel setup
screen
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
On Timer:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
Power Save in Standby Activated (
On
/
On Timer
)
§1
Deactivated
(
Off
)
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W
§3
Approx. 14 W
Startup time Not Quick
Quick
§2
Watching the picture
(e.g. Pay TV) from the
device connected to AV2
Cannot do Can do
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly
> 65, Signal Condition (Digital broadcast)
> 66, Manual Tuning (Analogue broadcast)
∫ To restart set up
> 64, Auto Setup Restart
Auto Setup
CH 1
Analogue Auto Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
Analogue channel setup
screen
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
b di bli Q i k S f i d
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
11
Brzi vodič
TV programi i drugi sadržaji snimaju se na tvrdi disk pomoću ovog uređaja.
Ako ih želite snimiti na diskove prvo ih morate snimiti na tvrdi disk a potom kopirati na diskove. (No, sadržaje možete izravno snimati na neke
diskove koristeći funkciju EXT LINK.)
U nastavku su navedene funkcije za koje se mogu koristiti tvrdi disk i različite vrste diskova.
HDD i diskovi koje možete upotrebljavati za snimanje/kopiranje i reproduciranje
(O: Moguće, -: Nije moguće)
Vrsta diska
Standardni simbol
DVD-RAM DVD-R
prije dovršetka postupka
nakon dovršetka postupka
(samo za videozapise)
DVD-R DL
prije dovršetka postupka
nakon dovršetka
postupka
Podaci koje se može snimati i
reproducirati
Videozapis, fotograja Videozapis ili fotograja
• Videozapisi i fotograje ne mogu
se miješati na istom disku.
Videozapis
Višestruko snimanje O -
Reprodukcija na drugim uređajima O
• Disk je moguće reproducirati
na Panasonicovim DVD
snimačima i DVD čitačima
koji su kompatibilni s DVD-
RAM-om.
O
• Potrebno je dovršiti postupak
(nalizirati) (→ 63).
O
• Potrebno je dovršiti postupak
(→ 63).
• Disk je moguće reproducirati samo
na opremi koja je kompatibilna s
DVD-R DL diskovima.
Snimanje mjeračem vremena -
Snimanje slike formata 16:9 (→ 22) O
Snimanje naslova zaštićenih
autorskim pravima
O* (EXT LINK) -
Formatiranje (→ 62) Potrebno Nije potrebno
* Ovisno o stupnju ograničenja kopiranja ovi naslovi možda neće biti snimljeni.
Vrsta diska
Standardni simbol
DVD-RW
prije dovršetka
postupka
nakon dovršetka
postupka
+RW
‒
+R
‒
prije dovršetka
postupka
nakon dovršetka
postupka
+R DL
‒
prije dovršetka
postupka
nakon dovršetka
postupka
Podaci koje se može snimati i
reproducirati
Videozapis
Višestruko snimanje O -
Reprodukcija na drugim uređajima O
• Potrebno je dovršiti
postupak (→ 63).
O
• Disk je moguće
reproducirati samo
na opremi koja je
kompatibilna s +RW
diskovima.
• Ako se disk ne
može reproducirati
na drugoj opremi,
preporučujemo
kreiranje glavnog
izbornika (→ 63).
O
• Potrebno je dovršiti
postupak (→ 63).
O
• Potrebno je dovršiti
postupak (→ 63).
• Disk je moguće
reproducirati samo
na opremi koja je
kompatibilna s +R DL
diskovima.
Snimanje mjeračem vremena -
Snimanje slike formata 16:9 (→ 22) O - (format 4:3)
Snimanje naslova zaštićenih
autorskim pravima
-
Formatiranje (→ 62) Potrebno
Vrsta diska
Standardni simbol
Tvrdi disk (HDD)
Podaci koje se može snimati i
reproducirati
Videozapis, fotograja,
glazba
Snimanje mjeračem vremena O
Snimanje slike formata 16:9 (→ 22) O
Snimanje naslova zaštićenih
autorskim pravima
O*
* Ovisno o stupnju ograničenja kopiranja ovi naslovi možda neće
biti snimljeni.
• Preporučuje se korištenje Panasonicovih diskova.
• Za dostupno vrijeme snimanja/kopiranja za različite diskove i
različite načine snimanja pogledajte “Načini snimanja i približno
trajanje snimanja/kopiranja" (→ 23).
• Ograničenja formatiranja i/ili snimanja/pokretanja mogu spriječiti
reproduciranje ili snimanje određenih diskova.
• Pogledajte tehničke podatke (→ 84) za kompatibilne verzije
diskova i brzine snimanja.
• Snimanje M 1 i/ili M 2 za dvojezična odašiljanja (→ 22, 52)
Podaci o HDD-u i disku
VQT3F54
12
Diskovi play-only
Vrsta diska Logotip: Standardni simbol Uporabe
DVD-Video Filmski i glazbeni diskovi visoke kvalitete
DVD-RW (Format
snimanja DVD-
Videozapisa)
DVD-RW videozapis snimljen na drugom DVD snimaču
• Možete reproducirati naslove zaštićene autorskim pravima
ako su snimljeni na diskove kompatibilne s CPRM-om.
• Ako formatirate disk (→ 62), možete snimati na disk u DVD-
Videoformatu.
• Možda će biti potrebno dovršiti postupak na opremi koja se
koristi za snimanje.
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DivX
®
/MP3/ JPEG • DVD-R i DVD-R DL s videozapisom snimljenim u formatu DivX
®
• DVD-R i DVD-R DL s glazbom snimljenom u formatu MP3
• DVD-R i DVD-R DL s fotograjama snimljenima u formatu
JPEG
CD Snimljeni zvuk i glazba (uključujući CD-R/RW*)
- DivX
®
/MP3/ JPEG • CD-R i CD-RW s videozapisom snimljenim u formatu DivX
®
• CD-R i CD-RW s glazbom snimljenom u formatu MP3/WMA
• CD-R i CD-RW s fotograjama snimljenima u formatu JPEG
Video CD • Snimljena glazba i videozapis (uključujući CD-R/RW*)
SVCD
* Zatvorite sesiju nakon snimanja. Uređaj možda neće moći reproducirati neke diskove zbog stanja snimke.
• Proizvođač diskova može kontrolirati kako se diskovi reproduciraju. Zato nećete uvijek moći kontrolirati reproduciranje kako je opisano u ovim
uputama za uporabu. Pažljivo pročitajte upute za diskove.
• Ne mogu se jamčiti rad i kvaliteta zvuka CD-a koji ne udovoljavaju tehničkim podacima CD-DA (kontrola kopiranja CD-a itd).
Diskovi koje nije moguće reproducirati
• 2,6 i 5,2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
• 3,95 i 4,7 GB DVD-R za kreiranje
• DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL snimljeni na drugom
uređaju i nedovršeni (→ 85).
• Diskovi snimljeni u formatu AVCHD.
• DVD-Video s brojem regije koji nije "2" ili "SVI".
• DVD-Audio
• Blu-ray, HD DVD
• DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, CD za fotograje,
CVD, SACD, MV-disk, PD
• DVD-RAM s uloškom (TIP 1)
Proizvođač ne prihvaća odgovornost i ne nudi nikakvu
naknadu za gubitak snimljenog ili uređivanog materijala
zbog problema s uređajem ili medijima na koje se može
snimati te ne prihvaća odgovornost i ne nudi naknadu za
oštećenja koja slijede, a koja su uzrokovana tim gubicima.
Primjeri takvih gubitaka su
• Disk koji je snimljen i uređen na ovom uređaju a reproducira se
na DVD snimaču ili pogonskoj jedinici računalnog diska koje je
proizvela neka druga tvrtka.
• Disk koji je korišten kako je gore navedeno i zatim ponovno
reproduciran na ovom uređaju.
• Disk koji je snimljen i uređen na DVD snimaču ili pogonskoj
jedinici računalnog diska koje je proizvela neka druga tvrtka a
reproducira se na ovom uređaju.
■ Format snimanja
Ovaj uređaj snima videozapise u sljedećim formatima.
Format snimanja DVD-Videozapisa
Ovo je metoda snimanja koja vam omogućuje snimanje/kopiranje i
uređivanje emitiranja TV signala itd.
• Možete obrisati neželjene dijelove naslova, kreirati Popise za
izvođenje (Videozapis) itd.
• Naslovi zaštićeni autorskim pravima (TV programi) mogu se
snimati na diskove koji su kompatibilni s CPRM-om pomoću
funkcije EXT LINK.
DVD-Videoformat
Ova metoda snimanja jednaka je DVD-Videu dostupnom na tržištu.
• Naslovi zaštićeni autorskim pravima ne mogu se snimati/kopirati
čak i ako koristite diskove koji su kompatibilni s CPRM-om.
• Nakon dovršetka postupka disk možete reproducirati na DVD
uređajima i drugoj opremi.
+VR (+R/+RW Videoformat za snimanje) format
Ovo je metoda za snimanje slika u pokretu na +R/+RW diskove.
Diskove snimljene na ovaj način možete reproducirati slično
kao i sadržaj koji je snimljen u formatu DVD-Video.
• Naslovi zaštićeni autorskim pravima ne mogu se snimati/kopirati.
• Nakon dovršetka postupka ili kreiranja glavnog izbornika možete
reproducirati disk na DVD čitačima i drugoj opremi.
• +R diskovi koji su snimljeni ovim uređajem i +R diskovi koji su
snimljeni na nekom drugom Panasonicovom DVD snimaču
mogu biti nekompatibilni. No, diskovi čiji je postupak dovršen
kompatibilni su i mogu se reproducirati.
• Ovaj uređaj ne može snimati NTSC signale na diskove koji već
imaju snimljene PAL signale. (No, obje se vrste programa mogu
snimati na HDD).
• Snimanje i reprodukcija možda neće biti mogući, ovisno o stanju
diska, odnosno o stanju snimke.
Vrste diskova ili naslova koji su
snimljeni na HDD-u ovisno o tipu
spojenog TV prijamnika
Kada koristite snimljene diskove koji su ili PAL ili NTSC ili
reproducirate naslov snimljen na HDD-u pomoću PAL-a ili NTSC-a,
pogledajte ovu tablicu.
(O: Moguće vidjeti, -: Nije moguće vidjeti)
Tip TV-a
Diskovi/naslovi
snimljeni na HDD-u
Yes (Da)/No (Ne)
Multisustav TV PAL Ο
NTSC Ο
PAL TV PAL Ο
NTSC Ο*1 (PAL60)
NTSC TV PAL -
NTSC Ο*
2
*1 Ako vaš uređaj nema opremu za rukovanje signalima PAL
525/60, slika neće biti dobro prikazana.
*2 Odaberite“NTSC” u “TV sustav” (→ 69).
• Pri reprodukciji diska ili naslova snimljenog na HDD-u, ujednačite
postavku na "TV sustav" s obzirom na disk ili naslov (PAL ili
NTSC) (→ 69).
Podaci o HDD-u i disku
Napomena
VQT3F54
13
Brzi vodič
DivX
Mediji za reprodukciju *
1
Format datoteke: DivX
• Datoteke moraju imati ekstenziju „.DIVX”, „.divx”, „.AVI” ili „.avi”.
Broj mapa
Maksimalan broj prepoznatljivih mapa: 300 mapa (uključujući i
glavnu mapu)
Broj datoteka
Maksimalan broj prepoznatljivih datoteka*
2
200 datoteka
Verzija podrške
Certicirano za prol DivX kućnog kina V3.0.
Videozapis
– Broj prijenosa: Do 1
– Kodek: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DX50
– 16 x 16 do 720 x 576 (25 kadrova/s)
16 x 16 do 720 x 480 (kadrova/s)
– Format slike: 10:11, 40:33, 16:11, 12:11, 1:1
Audio
– Broj prijenosa: Do 8
– Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital
– Višekanalni: Moguć je Dolby Digital. MPEG multi je 2-kanalna
konverzija.
– Brzina prijenosa: 16 kb/s do 320 kb/s (MP3/MPEG), 32 kb/s
do 448 kb/s (Dolby Digital)
– Frekvencija uzorkovanja: 16 kHz/22,05 kHz/24 kHz/32
kHz/44,1 kHz/48 kHz (MP3/MPEG)/32 kHz/44,1 kHz/48 kHz
(Dolby Digital)
MP3
Mediji za reprodukciju
Format datoteke: MP3
• Datoteke moraju imati ekstenziju „.mp3” ili „.MP3”.
Maksimalan broj prepoznatljivih mapa (grupa ili albuma):
300 mapa (grupa ili albuma) (uključujući glavnu mapu)
Maksimalan broj prepoznatljivih datoteka (zapisa)*
2
: 3000
datoteka (zapisa)
Brzina prijenosa:
32 kb/s do 320 kb/s
Frekvencija uzorkovanja:
16 kHz/22,05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44,1 kHz/48 kHz
ID3 oznake: kompatibilno ( )
• Ako postoji primjerice velika količina fotograja unutar MP3
datoteke, reproduciranje neće biti moguće.
Fotograje (JPEG*
3
)
Mediji za reprodukciju
Format datoteke: JPEG
• Datoteke moraju imati ekstenziju „.jpg” ili „.JPG”.
Kompatibilni pikseli
Između 34 x 34 i 6400 x 6400 (poduzorkovanje iznosi 4:2:2 ili 4:2:0)
Maksimalan broj prepoznatljivih mapa*
4
: 300 mapa
Ovaj uređaj može rukovati s najviše 300 mapa.
Maksimalan broj prepoznatljivih*
2
datoteka*
4:
3000 datoteka
Ovaj uređaj može rukovati s najviše 3000 datoteka.
MOTION JPEG/PROGRESSIVE JPEG: Ne podržava
*1 Videoslike DivX sadržaja koji su zaštićeni autorskim pravom i
pohranjeni na USB uređaj mogu se reproducirati samo HDMI
izlaznim priključnicama. (→ 34)
*2 Ukupan broj prepoznatljivih datoteka, uključujući MP3, JPEG,
DivX i druge vrste datoteka je 4000.
*3 Možda će proći nekoliko trenutaka dok se ne prikažu fotograje.
*4 Kada ima puno datoteka i/ili mapa, neke datoteke se možda
neće moći prikazati ili reproducirati.
• Kompatibilni formati:
ISO9660 razina 1 ili 2 (osim za proširene formate) i Joliet.
• Ovaj je uređaj kompatibilan s višestrukim sesijama/barijerom
(osim za DVD-R DL), ali očitavanje ili reproduciranje diska moglo
bi potrajati ako ima velik broj sesija.
• Za završetak postupka bit će potrebno određeno vrijeme kada
postoji mnogo datoteka (zapisa) i/ili mapa (grupa ili albuma), a neke
se datoteke (zapisi) možda neće moći prikazati ili reproducirati.
• Engleska abeceda i arapske brojke ispravno se prikazuju. Ostali
znakovi možda neće biti ispravno prikazani.
• Redoslijed prikazivanja na ovom uređaju može se razlikovati od
redoslijeda na računalu.
• Ovisno kako ste kreirali disk (softver za pisanje), datoteke (zapisi)
i mape (grupe ili albumi) se neće moći reproducirati u redoslijedu
kako su numerirani.
• Ovaj uređaj nije kompatibilan s formatom metode zapisa packet-write.
• Ovisno o uvjetima snimanja, disk se možda neće moći reproducirati.
• Kompatibilni formati: Usklađenost s DCF*
5
(sadržaj snimljen
digitalnim fotoaparatom itd.)
*5 Sustav Design rule for Camera File: jedinstveni standard koji je
izradila udruga Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA).
Podaci o USB memoriji
USB memorije koje možete koristiti s ovim uređajem
Kompatibilne USB memorije USB memorije koje su denirane kao USB uređaj za masovnu pohranu i digitalni fotoaparati koji
koriste PTP protokol:
– USB memorije koje podržavaju USB 1.0/1.1 i USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed (Puna brzina/Visoka brzina).
• Mogu se koristiti USB memorije do 128 GB.
• USB uređaji koji podržavaju prijenos "bulk only” (samo prijenos velike grupe podataka).
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) nije podržan.
• Digitalni fotoaparati koji zahtijevaju dodatnu instalaciju programa kada su spojeni na računalo nisu podržani.
• Uređaj MTP (Media Transport Protocol) nije podržan.
• Nije podržan USB čitač kartica s više ulaza.
Format Podržani su sustavi datoteka FAT16 i FAT32.
• Nije podržan uređaj koji koristi UDF/NTFS/exFAT sustav datoteka.
• Ovisno o veličini sektora, neke datoteke možda neće raditi.
• Podržana je samo prva particija na USB memorijama s više particija.
Prikazano u ovim uputama za
upotrebu kao
Podaci koje se može reproducirati ili
kopirati
(O: Moguće, -: Nije moguće)
Format datoteke DivX MP3 Fotograje (JPEG)
Reprodukcija O O O
Kopiranje na HDD - O O
Upute Možete reproducirati DivX
datoteke snimljene na računalu
na USB memoriju (→ 33).
Datoteke MP3 snimljene na
računalu na USB memoriju
možete reproducirati i kopirati na
HDD (→ 37, 58).
Fotograje snimljene na računalu
na USB memoriju možete
reproducirati i kopirati na HDD, ili
DVD-RAM (→ 35, 57).
* Videoslike DivX sadržaja koji su zaštićeni autorskim pravom i pohranjeni na USB uređaj mogu se reproducirati samo HDMI izlaznim priključcima. (→ 34)
• Unatoč navedenim ispunjenim uvjetima, neke se USB memorije možda neće moći koristiti s ovim uređajem.
• Ako je Panasonicova digitalna videokamera s HDD-om itd. spojena na USB priključak ovog uređaja, možete kopirati SD videosadržaj snimljen
kamerom na HDD ili DVD-RAM ovog uređaja.
• USB priključak ovog uređaja ne podržava USB uređaj s napajanjem putem sabirnice.
DivX datoteke, glazbene datoteke i fotograje (JPEG)
Napomena
14
VQT3F54
Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
≥When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen
is displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related
operations (> 33, 56, 57).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
∫ How to hold a disc
Do not touch the recorded surface.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you
want to play them.
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed in the order
they were updated or taken.
[RAM]
Folders can be created on other equipment.
§
These folders cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has been input
using other equipment, the name may not be
displayed properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)
002
001
001
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
003
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
Root
Order of play
(folder=group)
(file=track)
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
Root
Order of play
002 Folder
003 Folder
004 Folder
DCIM
JPEG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXXX
XXXXX
DCIM
XXXX
.JPG
Root
Inserting discs
Inserting/removing the USB memory
Insert label-up.
Note
Disc care
DO
DO NOT
DO DO NOT
DO NOT
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 14 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
14
Umetanje diskova
Pritisnite [ OPEN/CLOSE] da biste otvorili ladicu diska.
Umetnite disk s oznakom prema gore.
Pritisnite [ OPEN/CLOSE] da biste zatvorili ladicu diska.
Funkcija automatskog odabira pogona
• Ako uređaj snima na HDD ili je zaustavljen, automatski se
prebacuje na DVD pogon kada se umetne disk.
• Ako izvadite disk i zatvorite ladicu diska, automatski se odabire
HDD pogon.
• Kada koristite DVD-RAM ili DVD-R, uklonite disk iz uloška. Ulošci
za disk ne mogu se upotrebljavati.
• Nije moguće neprekinuto snimanje i reproduciranje s
jedne strane dvostranog diska na drugu. Morat ćete izvaditi disk i
okrenuti ga.
Umetanje/vađenje USB memorije
Umetanje USB memorije
• Prije umetanja USB memorije u uređaj,
napravite sigurnosnu kopiju podataka.
• Provjerite smjer umetanja u USB
priključak i potom umetnite memoriju.
• Umetnite USB memoriju dok je uređaj
zaustavljen, tako da se pojavi zaslon
"USB device” (USB uređaj). Odaberite
stavku i pritisnite [OK] da biste se
prebacili na rad povezan s USB uređajima (→ 33, 56, 57).
Uklanjanje USB memorije
• Dovršite sve radnje s USB-om i izvucite USB memoriju van.
• Ako se USB memoriju izvuče van dok joj se pristupa, može doći
do oštećenja podataka.
Rukovanje diskom
■ Držanje diska
Nemojte dirati površinu na koju se snima.
■ Ako na disku ima kondenzacije ili prljavštine
Najprije obrišite vlažnom, a zatim suhom krpom.
■ Mjere opreza pri rukovanju
• Pazite na ogrebotine i prljavštinu.
• Na diskove ne lijepite oznake ili naljepnice. (To može uzrokovati
deformaciju diska i neuravnoteženo okretanje te ga učiniti
neupotrebljivim.)
• Pišite na strani s oznakom diska mekanim omasterom s tintom na
bazi ulja. Nemojte koristiti kemijske olovke ili druga sredstva za pisanje.
• Nemojte koristiti sprejeve za čišćenje gramofonskih ploča,
benzin, razrjeđivač, tekućine koje sprečavaju stvaranje statičkog
elektriciteta ili bilo koje drugo otapalo.
• Nemojte koristiti zaštitnike ili presvlake protiv grebanja.
• Pripazite da ne dođe do ispadanja i udaranja diskova. Nemojte
stavljati nikakve predmete na diskove.
• Nemojte koristiti sljedeće diskove:
– Diskove na kojima je ljepilo skinutih
naljepnica ili oznaka (diskovi za
iznajmljivanje itd.).
– Diskove koji su jako deformirani ili napukli.
– Diskove nepravilnih oblika, kao što je
oblik srca.
• Nemojte ih ostavljati na sljedećim
mjestima:
– Izravno izložene sunčevoj svjetlosti.
– Na izrazito prašnjavim ili vlažnim mjestima.
– U blizini grijalice.
– Na mjestima izloženima značajnim temperaturnim razlikama
(može doći do kondenzacije).
– Na mjestima gdje bi uređaj bio izložen statičkom elektricitetu ili
elektromagnetskim valovima.
• Da biste zaštitili diskove od ogrebotina i prljavštine, vratite ih u
njihove zaštitne kutijice kada ih ne koristite.
■ Struktura mapa ovog uređaja
Možete reproducirati glazbene datoteke (MP3) i fotograje (JPEG) na ovom uređaju stvarajući mape kako je prikazano u nastavku.
No, ovisno o metodi pisanja podataka (softver za pisanje), reproduciranje možda neće moći biti ostvareno redoslijedom kojim ste
numerirali mape.
DivX
®
datoteke, glazbene datoteke i fotograje (JPEG)
Struktura MP3 mapa Strukture mapa koje sadrže fotograje
Za reprodukciju u željenom redoslijedu,
ispred unesite 3-znamenkaste brojeve.
Datoteke unutar direktorija prikazane su u
redoslijedu kojem su ažurirane ili preuzete.
Mape se mogu kreirati na drugoj opremi.
• Ove mape ne mogu biti odabrane kao
odredište kopiranja.
• Ako je naziv mape ili datoteke kreiran na
drugoj opremi, možda se ime neće prikazati
ispravno ili nećete moći reproducirati i
uređivati podatke.
Izvorna mapa
Izvorna mapa
Redoslijed
reproduciranja
Mapa
Mapa
Mapa
Rukovanje medijima (Disk/USB memorija)
Izvorna mapa
(mapa = grupa)
Redoslijed
reproduciranja
(datoteka = zapis)
14
VQT3F54
Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
≥When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen
is displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related
operations (> 33, 56, 57).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
∫ How to hold a disc
Do not touch the recorded surface.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you
want to play them.
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed in the order
they were updated or taken.
[RAM]
Folders can be created on other equipment.
§
These folders cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has been input
using other equipment, the name may not be
displayed properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)
002
001
001
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
003
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
Root
Order of play
(folder=group)
(file=track)
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
Root
Order of play
002 Folder
003 Folder
004 Folder
DCIM
JPEG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXXX
XXXXX
DCIM
XXXX
.JPG
Root
Inserting discs
Inserting/removing the USB memory
Insert label-up.
Note
Disc care
DO
DO NOT
DO DO NOT
DO NOT
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 14 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
14
VQT3F54
Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
≥When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen
is displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related
operations (> 33, 56, 57).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
∫ How to hold a disc
Do not touch the recorded surface.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you
want to play them.
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed in the order
they were updated or taken.
[RAM]
Folders can be created on other equipment.
§
These folders cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has been input
using other equipment, the name may not be
displayed properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)
002
001
001
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
003
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
Root
Order of play
(folder=group)
(file=track)
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
Root
Order of play
002 Folder
003 Folder
004 Folder
DCIM
JPEG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXXX
XXXXX
DCIM
XXXX
.JPG
Root
Inserting discs
Inserting/removing the USB memory
Insert label-up.
Note
Disc care
DO
DO NOT
DO DO NOT
DO NOT
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 14 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
14
VQT3F54
Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
≥When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen
is displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related
operations (> 33, 56, 57).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
∫ How to hold a disc
Do not touch the recorded surface.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you
want to play them.
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed in the order
they were updated or taken.
[RAM]
Folders can be created on other equipment.
§
These folders cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has been input
using other equipment, the name may not be
displayed properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)
002
001
001
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
003
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
Root
Order of play
(folder=group)
(file=track)
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
Root
Order of play
002 Folder
003 Folder
004 Folder
DCIM
JPEG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXXX
XXXXX
DCIM
XXXX
.JPG
Root
Inserting discs
Inserting/removing the USB memory
Insert label-up.
Note
Disc care
DO
DO NOT
DO DO NOT
DO NOT
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 14 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
14
VQT3F54
Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
≥When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen
is displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related
operations (> 33, 56, 57).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
∫ How to hold a disc
Do not touch the recorded surface.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you
want to play them.
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed in the order
they were updated or taken.
[RAM]
Folders can be created on other equipment.
§
These folders cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has been input
using other equipment, the name may not be
displayed properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)
002
001
001
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
003
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
Root
Order of play
(folder=group)
(file=track)
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
Root
Order of play
002 Folder
003 Folder
004 Folder
DCIM
JPEG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXXX
XXXXX
DCIM
XXXX
.JPG
Root
Inserting discs
Inserting/removing the USB memory
Insert label-up.
Note
Disc care
DO
DO NOT
DO DO NOT
DO NOT
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 14 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
14
VQT3F54
Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
≥When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen
is displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related
operations (> 33, 56, 57).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
∫ How to hold a disc
Do not touch the recorded surface.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you
want to play them.
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed in the order
they were updated or taken.
[RAM]
Folders can be created on other equipment.
§
These folders cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has been input
using other equipment, the name may not be
displayed properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)
002
001
001
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
003
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
Root
Order of play
(folder=group)
(file=track)
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
Root
Order of play
002 Folder
003 Folder
004 Folder
DCIM
JPEG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.JPG
XXXXX
XXXXX
DCIM
XXXX
.JPG
Root
Inserting discs
Inserting/removing the USB memory
Insert label-up.
Note
Disc care
DO
DO NOT
DO DO NOT
DO NOT
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 14 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
ISPRAVNO
ISPRAVNO
NEISPRAVNO
NEISPRAVNO
NEISPRAVNO
Napomena
15
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
Watching TV
Basic operations
This DVD recorder supports analogue TV
broadcasting and terrestrial digital TV
broadcasting with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and MPEG-2
codec. But HD broadcasts are down-converted to
SD video when this unit receives them.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
≥It is recommended to create a Favourite of the channels you watch
often (> 64, Favourites Edit) or to select channels from Category
(> below) for skipping unwanted channels, such as encrypted
pay-TV or testing broadcast channels.
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 64, Favourites Edit)
1 While watching TV
Press [STATUS ] to show Digital
channel information.
“Change Category” is displayed.
≥If it is not displayed, press [STATUS ] several times.
2 Press the “Blue” button to select
Category.
Category changes in the following order:
All ChannelsJ TV J Radio J Created Favourites
§
J All
Channels
§
Created Favourites > 64, Favourites Edit
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥Display time of Digital channel information can be changed (> 68,
On-Screen Messages).
≥Digital channel information remains displayed when Radio channel
is selected.
≥Digital channel information is not displayed while watching
analogue broadcasts or broadcasts from AV1/AV2 input terminal.
∫ If the Child Lock message appears
If you set the “Child Lock” in the “Tuning” menu of the Setup menu
(> 65) to prevent your children from viewing inappropriate channels,
and the locked channel is selected, the following message appears.
To unlock this channel temporarily
1 Press [OK].
A confirmation screen appears
and press the
numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN.
2 Press [OK].
∫ If New Channel Message appears
When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.)
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 65, New Channel
Message).
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
Select the channel
Select the channel from Category
AUDIO
STTL
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
STATUS
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
“D” means digital broadcasts.
Note
352 ABC2
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
352 ABC2
TV
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
Note
This channel is locked. Press OK to enter PIN.
Approved for children older than XX years.
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
New Channel
NoYes
OK
RETURN
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 15 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
15
Gledanje TV-a
Brzi vodič
Pogledati “Prelazak zemaljskih odašiljanja na digitalni
signal” (→ 86).
Odaberite kanal.
1 Uključite TV prijamnik i odaberite
odgovarajući AV priključak koji će
odgovarati priključcima na ovom uređaju.
2 Pritisnite [ ] da biste uključili uređaj.
3 Pritisnite [∧ ∨ CH] da biste odabrali kanal.
Svaki put kad promijenite stanicu automatski će se pojaviti
podaci o digitalnom kanalu (samo za zemaljske digitalne
kanale). Kanali su prikazani tako da su prvo prikazani
digitalni kanali, a zatim analogni.
• Možete odabrati kanal i pomoću numeričkih gumba.
Pritisnite numeričke gumbe i potom [OK].
“D” znači digitalno odašiljanje.
• Preporučuje se stvaranje popisa omiljenih kanala koje često
gledate (→ 64, Uređivanje omiljenih kanala) ili odabir kanala iz
kategorije (→ u nastavku) kako bi se izbjegli neželjeni kanali,
poput šifriranih televizijskih kanala ili testiranih odašiljanja.
Odaberite kanal iz kategorije
Odabir kanala je jednostavan ako stvorite popis omiljenih kanala
koje često gledate. (→ 64, Uređivanje omiljenih kanala)
1 Prilikom gledanja TV programa
Pritisnite [STATUS ] da bi se
prikazao izbornik Podaci o digitalnom
kanalu.
Ovaj DVD snimač podržava analogno odašiljanje televizijskog
programa i zemaljsko digitalno odašiljanje televizijskog programa
s H.264/MPEG-4 AVC i kodekom MPEG-2. No, kad uređaj primi
odašiljanje u visokoj deniciji ono će se pretvoriti u videosadržaj
standardne razlučivosti.
Prikazat će se "Promjena kategorije".
• Ako se ne prikaže, pritisnite [STATUS ] nekoliko puta.
2 Pritisnite plavi gumb da biste
odabrali kategoriju.
Kategorije se mijenjaju prema sljedećem redoslijedu:
Svi kanali → TV → Radio → Popis omiljenih kanala* →
Svi kanali
* Popis omiljenih kanala → 64, Uređivanje omiljenih kanala
3 Pritisnite [∧ ∨ CH] da biste odabrali
kanal.
• Moguće je izmijeniti vrijeme prikazano u izborniku Podaci o
digitalnom kanalu (→ 68, Poruke na zaslonu).
• Podaci o digitalnom kanalu i dalje se prikazuju kada je odabran
radijski kanal.
• Podaci o digitalnom kanalu ne prikazuju se prilikom gledanja
analognih odašiljanja ili odašiljanja s AV1/AV2 ulaznog priključka.
■ Pojava poruke o roditeljskoj zaštiti
Ako u Izborniku za podešavanje unutar Izbornika za postavljanje
postavite roditeljsku zaštitu (→ 65) da biste spriječili da vaša djeca
gledaju neprimjerene kanale, kod odabira zaključanog kanala
prikazat će se sljedeća poruka.
Ovaj je kanal zaključan. Pritisnite OK za unos PIN-a.
Odobreno za djecu stariju od XX godina.
Privremeno otključavanje kanala
Pritisnite [OK]. Nakon pojave zaslona za potvrdu pritisnite
numeričke gumbe za unos svog 4-znamenkastog PIN-a.
Pritisnite [OK].
■ Pojava poruke o novom kanalu
Kad se doda novi DVB kanal, uređaj će automatski o tome
biti obaviješten. Nakon toga se prikazuje poruka potvrde. Ako
odaberete "Da" na zaslonu, započinje automatsko postavljanje
(Brišu se postavke svih kanala. Programi na kojima se snima
mjeračem vremena također se poništavaju.)
Postavka uključivanja/isključivanja prikaza može se promijeniti
(→ 65, Poruka o novom kanalu).
15
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
Watching TV
Basic operations
This DVD recorder supports analogue TV
broadcasting and terrestrial digital TV
broadcasting with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and MPEG-2
codec. But HD broadcasts are down-converted to
SD video when this unit receives them.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
≥It is recommended to create a Favourite of the channels you watch
often (> 64, Favourites Edit) or to select channels from Category
(> below) for skipping unwanted channels, such as encrypted
pay-TV or testing broadcast channels.
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 64, Favourites Edit)
1 While watching TV
Press [STATUS ] to show Digital
channel information.
“Change Category” is displayed.
≥If it is not displayed, press [STATUS ] several times.
2 Press the “Blue” button to select
Category.
Category changes in the following order:
All ChannelsJ TV J Radio J Created Favourites
§
J All
Channels
§
Created Favourites > 64, Favourites Edit
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥Display time of Digital channel information can be changed (> 68,
On-Screen Messages).
≥Digital channel information remains displayed when Radio channel
is selected.
≥Digital channel information is not displayed while watching
analogue broadcasts or broadcasts from AV1/AV2 input terminal.
∫ If the Child Lock message appears
If you set the “Child Lock” in the “Tuning” menu of the Setup menu
(> 65) to prevent your children from viewing inappropriate channels,
and the locked channel is selected, the following message appears.
To unlock this channel temporarily
1 Press [OK].
A confirmation screen appears
and press the
numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN.
2 Press [OK].
∫ If New Channel Message appears
When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.)
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 65, New Channel
Message).
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
Select the channel
Select the channel from Category
AUDIO
STTL
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
STATUS
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
“D” means digital broadcasts.
Note
352 ABC2
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
352 ABC2
TV
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
Note
This channel is locked. Press OK to enter PIN.
Approved for children older than XX years.
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
New Channel
NoYes
OK
RETURN
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 15 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
15
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
Watching TV
Basic operations
This DVD recorder supports analogue TV
broadcasting and terrestrial digital TV
broadcasting with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and MPEG-2
codec. But HD broadcasts are down-converted to
SD video when this unit receives them.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
≥It is recommended to create a Favourite of the channels you watch
often (> 64, Favourites Edit) or to select channels from Category
(> below) for skipping unwanted channels, such as encrypted
pay-TV or testing broadcast channels.
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 64, Favourites Edit)
1 While watching TV
Press [STATUS ] to show Digital
channel information.
“Change Category” is displayed.
≥If it is not displayed, press [STATUS ] several times.
2 Press the “Blue” button to select
Category.
Category changes in the following order:
All ChannelsJ TV J Radio J Created Favourites
§
J All
Channels
§
Created Favourites > 64, Favourites Edit
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥Display time of Digital channel information can be changed (> 68,
On-Screen Messages).
≥Digital channel information remains displayed when Radio channel
is selected.
≥Digital channel information is not displayed while watching
analogue broadcasts or broadcasts from AV1/AV2 input terminal.
∫ If the Child Lock message appears
If you set the “Child Lock” in the “Tuning” menu of the Setup menu
(> 65) to prevent your children from viewing inappropriate channels,
and the locked channel is selected, the following message appears.
To unlock this channel temporarily
1 Press [OK].
A confirmation screen appears
and press the
numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN.
2 Press [OK].
∫ If New Channel Message appears
When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.)
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 65, New Channel
Message).
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
Select the channel
Select the channel from Category
AUDIO
STTL
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
STATUS
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
“D” means digital broadcasts.
Note
352 ABC2
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
352 ABC2
TV
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
Note
This channel is locked. Press OK to enter PIN.
Approved for children older than XX years.
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
New Channel
NoYes
OK
RETURN
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 15 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
15
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
Watching TV
Basic operations
This DVD recorder supports analogue TV
broadcasting and terrestrial digital TV
broadcasting with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and MPEG-2
codec. But HD broadcasts are down-converted to
SD video when this unit receives them.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
≥It is recommended to create a Favourite of the channels you watch
often (> 64, Favourites Edit) or to select channels from Category
(> below) for skipping unwanted channels, such as encrypted
pay-TV or testing broadcast channels.
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 64, Favourites Edit)
1 While watching TV
Press [STATUS ] to show Digital
channel information.
“Change Category” is displayed.
≥If it is not displayed, press [STATUS ] several times.
2 Press the “Blue” button to select
Category.
Category changes in the following order:
All ChannelsJ TV J Radio J Created Favourites
§
J All
Channels
§
Created Favourites > 64, Favourites Edit
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥Display time of Digital channel information can be changed (> 68,
On-Screen Messages).
≥Digital channel information remains displayed when Radio channel
is selected.
≥Digital channel information is not displayed while watching
analogue broadcasts or broadcasts from AV1/AV2 input terminal.
∫ If the Child Lock message appears
If you set the “Child Lock” in the “Tuning” menu of the Setup menu
(> 65) to prevent your children from viewing inappropriate channels,
and the locked channel is selected, the following message appears.
To unlock this channel temporarily
1 Press [OK].
A confirmation screen appears
and press the
numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN.
2 Press [OK].
∫ If New Channel Message appears
When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.)
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 65, New Channel
Message).
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
Select the channel
Select the channel from Category
AUDIO
STTL
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
STATUS
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
“D” means digital broadcasts.
Note
352 ABC2
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
352 ABC2
TV
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
Note
This channel is locked. Press OK to enter PIN.
Approved for children older than XX years.
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
New Channel
NoYes
OK
RETURN
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 15 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
15
VQT3F54
Quick Start
Guide
Watching TV
Basic operations
This DVD recorder supports analogue TV
broadcasting and terrestrial digital TV
broadcasting with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and MPEG-2
codec. But HD broadcasts are down-converted to
SD video when this unit receives them.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
≥It is recommended to create a Favourite of the channels you watch
often (> 64, Favourites Edit) or to select channels from Category
(> below) for skipping unwanted channels, such as encrypted
pay-TV or testing broadcast channels.
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 64, Favourites Edit)
1 While watching TV
Press [STATUS ] to show Digital
channel information.
“Change Category” is displayed.
≥If it is not displayed, press [STATUS ] several times.
2 Press the “Blue” button to select
Category.
Category changes in the following order:
All ChannelsJ TV J Radio J Created Favourites
§
J All
Channels
§
Created Favourites > 64, Favourites Edit
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥Display time of Digital channel information can be changed (> 68,
On-Screen Messages).
≥Digital channel information remains displayed when Radio channel
is selected.
≥Digital channel information is not displayed while watching
analogue broadcasts or broadcasts from AV1/AV2 input terminal.
∫ If the Child Lock message appears
If you set the “Child Lock” in the “Tuning” menu of the Setup menu
(> 65) to prevent your children from viewing inappropriate channels,
and the locked channel is selected, the following message appears.
To unlock this channel temporarily
1 Press [OK].
A confirmation screen appears
and press the
numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN.
2 Press [OK].
∫ If New Channel Message appears
When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.)
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 65, New Channel
Message).
See “Digital switchover for terrestrial broadcasts” (> 86).
Select the channel
Select the channel from Category
AUDIO
STTL
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
STATUS
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
“D” means digital broadcasts.
Note
352 ABC2
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
352 ABC2
TV
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
TXT
Note
This channel is locked. Press OK to enter PIN.
Approved for children older than XX years.
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
New Channel
NoYes
OK
RETURN
Basic
operations
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 15 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
Osnovne radnje
Numerički
gumbi
STATUS
Gumbi u boji
U redu
Napomena
Napomena
16
VQT3F54
Watching TV
While stopped
Press [STATUS ] to show the information
screen.
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ]
again (only when “info ” is displayed).
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
Encrypted
The encrypted broadcasting (pay-TV etc.) is being received.
Encrypted programmes cannot be viewed with this unit.
Signal Quality
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is
displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
When “Subtitles” appears in digital channel information (> left)
Press [STTL ].
≥Press again to hide the subtitle.
≥Programmes are recorded with subtitle when you record them with
the subtitle displayed (> 19).
When there are multiple audio or subtitles in the current programme,
you can change the language while viewing the programme.
If the channel is changed or the unit goes standby, the language will
be returned to the one selected in “DVB Preferred Language” of the
Setup menu. If you want to change the default preferred language,
you need to select the preferred language in “DVB Preferred
Language”. (> 65).
1 Press [DISPLAY].
2 Highlight the language setting section
for “DVB Multi Audio” or “DVB
Subtitles”.
For DVB Multi Audio
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Sound” menu and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Multi Audio” and press [1].
For DVB Subtitles
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Other” menu and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Subtitles” and press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language.
Digital channel information
1 Programme name and
Broadcast time
2 Channel and Station Name
3 Progress of the current
programme
4 Signal Quality (> below)
5 Category (Favourite > 64)
6 Change the category
7 Encrypted (> below)
8 Teletext (> 17)
9 NOW:
Information about the current
programme
NEXT:
Information about the following
programme
: Programme is broadcast in
multi-channel sound (> right)
To change the audio language
(> 65, DVB Preferred
Language)
; Locked (> 65)
< Subtitles (> right)
= To display detailed information
(> below)
No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received.
No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.
If “No Signal” is displayed:
≥Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
352 ABC2
No Signal
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
Multi Audio
Encrypted.
SubtitleTXT
Locked
Note
To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only)
To change the language for DVB Multi
Audio or DVB Subtitles while viewing
the programme (Digital broadcast only)
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 16 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
16
Podaci o digitalnom kanalu
Dok je uređaj zaustavljen
Pritisnite [STATUS ] za prikaz zaslona s
podacima.
Za izmjenu podataka o trenutnom i sljedećem programu
Pritisnite [◄,►].
Prikaz detaljnih podataka o programu
Pritisnite ponovno [STATUS ] (samo kada se na zaslonu prikaže
"info").
Isključivanje prikaza zaslona s podacima
Pritisnite [STATUS ] jednom ili dvaput.
Šifrirano
Prima se šifrirano odašiljanje (TV programi koji se plaćaju itd.).
Šifrirane programe nije moguće gledati na ovom uređaju.
Kvaliteta signala
Nema signala: Ne prima se signal digitalnog odašiljanja.
Nema usluge: Trenutačno nije dostupno niti jedno odašiljanje.
Ako se prikaže "No signal" (Nema signala):
• Prilagodite položaj i smjer antene.
• Provjerite odašilje li se pravilno kanal digitalnog odašiljanja.
Možete odabrati i neki drugi kanal kad je prikazan zaslon s
podacima pritiskom na [▲,▼] i [OK].
Naziv programa i vrijeme
odašiljanja
Naziv kanala i postaje
Tijek trenutnog programa
Kvaliteta signala (→ u
nastavku)
Kategorija (Omiljeni → 64)
Promjena kategorije
Šifrirano (→ u nastavku)
Teletekst (→ 17)
SADA:
Podaci o trenutnom
programu
SLJEDEĆE:
Podaci o sljedećim
programima
Program se odašilje u
višekanalnom zvuku
(→ desno) Promjena jezika
zvuka (→ 65, DVB željeni
jezik)
Zaključano (→ 65)
Podnaslovi (→ desno)
Prikaz detaljnih informacija
(→ u nastavku)
Prikaz podnaslova (Samo za digitalno
odašiljanje)
Kada se pojavi natpis "Podnaslovi" u podacima o digitalnom kanalu
(→ lijevo)
Pritisnite [STTL ].
• Ponovno pritisnite da biste isključili podnaslov.
• Programi su snimljeni s podnaslovom kada ih snimate s
prikazanim podnaslovima (→ 19).
Promjena jezika za DVB više zvukova
ili DVB podnaslove tijekom gledanja
programa (samo za digitalno odašiljanje)
U slučaju da ima više zvukova ili podnaslova u trenutnom
programu, možete promijeniti jezik tijekom gledanja programa.
Ako se promijeni kanal ili uređaj prijeđe u stanje čekanja, jezik
će se vratiti na onaj odabran u "DVB željeni jezik" u Izborniku za
postavljanje. Ako želite promijeniti postavljeni jezik, morate odabrati
željeni jezik u "DVB željeni jezik". (→ 65).
1 Pritisnite [DISPLAY] (zaslon).
2 Označite dio za postavljanje jezika
za "DVB više zvukova" ili "DVB
podnaslovi".
Za DVB više zvukova
Pritisnite [▲, ▼] za odabir izbornika "Zvuk" i potom [►].
Pritisnite [▲,▼] za odabir "DVB više zvukova" i potom [►].
Za DVB podnaslove
Pritisnite [▲, ▼] za odabir izbornika "Ostalo" i potom [►].
Pritisnite [▲,▼] za odabir "DVB podnaslovi" i potom [►].
3 Pritisnite [▲,▼] za odabir jezika.
Gledanje TV-a
16
VQT3F54
Watching TV
While stopped
Press [STATUS ] to show the information
screen.
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ]
again (only when “info ” is displayed).
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
Encrypted
The encrypted broadcasting (pay-TV etc.) is being received.
Encrypted programmes cannot be viewed with this unit.
Signal Quality
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is
displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
When “Subtitles” appears in digital channel information (> left)
Press [STTL ].
≥Press again to hide the subtitle.
≥Programmes are recorded with subtitle when you record them with
the subtitle displayed (> 19).
When there are multiple audio or subtitles in the current programme,
you can change the language while viewing the programme.
If the channel is changed or the unit goes standby, the language will
be returned to the one selected in “DVB Preferred Language” of the
Setup menu. If you want to change the default preferred language,
you need to select the preferred language in “DVB Preferred
Language”. (> 65).
1 Press [DISPLAY].
2 Highlight the language setting section
for “DVB Multi Audio” or “DVB
Subtitles”.
For DVB Multi Audio
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Sound” menu and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Multi Audio” and press [1].
For DVB Subtitles
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Other” menu and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Subtitles” and press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language.
Digital channel information
1
Programme name and
Broadcast time
2
Channel and Station Name
3
Progress of the current
programme
4 Signal Quality (> below)
5 Category (Favourite > 64)
6 Change the category
7 Encrypted (> below)
8 Teletext (> 17)
9 NOW:
Information about the current
programme
NEXT:
Information about the following
programme
: Programme is broadcast in
multi-channel sound (> right)
To change the audio language
(> 65, DVB Preferred
Language)
; Locked (> 65)
< Subtitles (> right)
= To display detailed information
(> below)
No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received.
No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.
If “No Signal” is displayed:
≥Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
352 ABC2
No Signal
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
Multi Audio
Encrypted.
SubtitleTXT
Locked
Note
To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only)
To change the language for DVB Multi
Audio or DVB Subtitles while viewing
the programme (Digital broadcast only)
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 16 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
16
VQT3F54
Watching TV
While stopped
Press [STATUS ] to show the information
screen.
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ]
again (only when “info ” is displayed).
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
Encrypted
The encrypted broadcasting (pay-TV etc.) is being received.
Encrypted programmes cannot be viewed with this unit.
Signal Quality
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is
displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
When “Subtitles” appears in digital channel information (> left)
Press [STTL ].
≥Press again to hide the subtitle.
≥Programmes are recorded with subtitle when you record them with
the subtitle displayed (> 19).
When there are multiple audio or subtitles in the current programme,
you can change the language while viewing the programme.
If the channel is changed or the unit goes standby, the language will
be returned to the one selected in “DVB Preferred Language” of the
Setup menu. If you want to change the default preferred language,
you need to select the preferred language in “DVB Preferred
Language”. (> 65).
1 Press [DISPLAY].
2 Highlight the language setting section
for “DVB Multi Audio” or “DVB
Subtitles”.
For DVB Multi Audio
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Sound” menu and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Multi Audio” and press [1].
For DVB Subtitles
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Other” menu and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Subtitles” and press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language.
Digital channel information
1 Programme name and
Broadcast time
2 Channel and Station Name
3 Progress of the current
programme
4 Signal Quality (> below)
5 Category (Favourite > 64)
6 Change the category
7 Encrypted (> below)
8 Teletext (> 17)
9 NOW:
Information about the current
programme
NEXT:
Information about the following
programme
:
Programme is broadcast in
multi-channel sound (> right)
To change the audio language
(> 65, DVB Preferred
Language)
;
Locked (> 65)
<
Subtitles (> right)
=
To display detailed information
(> below)
No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received.
No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.
If “No Signal” is displayed:
≥Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
352 ABC2
No Signal
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
Multi Audio
Encrypted.
SubtitleTXT
Locked
Note
To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only)
To change the language for DVB Multi
Audio or DVB Subtitles while viewing
the programme (Digital broadcast only)
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 16 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
16
VQT3F54
Watching TV
While stopped
Press [STATUS ] to show the information
screen.
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ]
again (only when “info ” is displayed).
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
Encrypted
The encrypted broadcasting (pay-TV etc.) is being received.
Encrypted programmes cannot be viewed with this unit.
Signal Quality
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is
displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
When “Subtitles” appears in digital channel information (> left)
Press [STTL ].
≥Press again to hide the subtitle.
≥Programmes are recorded with subtitle when you record them with
the subtitle displayed (> 19).
When there are multiple audio or subtitles in the current programme,
you can change the language while viewing the programme.
If the channel is changed or the unit goes standby, the language will
be returned to the one selected in “DVB Preferred Language” of the
Setup menu. If you want to change the default preferred language,
you need to select the preferred language in “DVB Preferred
Language”. (> 65).
1 Press [DISPLAY].
2 Highlight the language setting section
for “DVB Multi Audio” or “DVB
Subtitles”.
For DVB Multi Audio
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Sound” menu and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Multi Audio” and press [1].
For DVB Subtitles
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Other” menu and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Subtitles” and press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language.
Digital channel information
1 Programme name and
Broadcast time
2 Channel and Station Name
3 Progress of the current
programme
4
Signal Quality (> below)
5
Category (Favourite > 64)
6
Change the category
7
Encrypted (> below)
8
Teletext (> 17)
9
NOW:
Information about the current
programme
NEXT:
Information about the following
programme
: Programme is broadcast in
multi-channel sound (> right)
To change the audio language
(> 65, DVB Preferred
Language)
; Locked (> 65)
< Subtitles (> right)
= To display detailed information
(> below)
No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received.
No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.
If “No Signal” is displayed:
≥Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
352 ABC2
No Signal
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
info
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
NOW
Multi Audio
Encrypted.
SubtitleTXT
Locked
Note
To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only)
To change the language for DVB Multi
Audio or DVB Subtitles while viewing
the programme (Digital broadcast only)
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 16 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
Napomena
Osnovne radnje
17
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Viewing Teletext (Digital broadcast only)
You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.
“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 16).
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support Teletext services.
1 While viewing the programme
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext screen appears.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4]
and the colour buttons.
To exit the screen
Press [TEXT ].
After performing step 1
Press [OPTION] and press the
corresponding colour button.
≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.
≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while
to be displayed.
≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character
Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)
Basic Teletext viewing
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
AUDIO
CH
ヵユヹヵ
,,,
OK
OPTION
TEXT
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
15. 05. 09 18:00:00P100 100 ABC
Current page
number
Colour button
bar
Date/time
e.g.
Using Teletext conveniently
Reveal hidden data
Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)
Press the “Red” button.
≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.
Change the screen size
You can change the Teletext screen size.
Press the “Green” button.
≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.
View temporarily a TV programme while the
Teletext screen is being displayed
Press the “Yellow” button.
≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.
View sub page
If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub
pages can be displayed.
1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of
the desired sub page with
the numbered buttons.
Sub page is displayed.
≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].
≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can
watch TV (> above).
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
(Normal)
(Top)
(Bottom)
Appears
when updating
is completed.
Broadcast
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 17 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
17
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Viewing Teletext (Digital broadcast only)
You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.
“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 16).
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support Teletext services.
1 While viewing the programme
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext screen appears.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4]
and the colour buttons.
To exit the screen
Press [TEXT ].
After performing step 1
Press [OPTION] and press the
corresponding colour button.
≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.
≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while
to be displayed.
≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character
Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)
Basic Teletext viewing
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
AUDIO
CH
ヵユヹヵ
,,,
OK
OPTION
TEXT
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
15. 05. 09 18:00:00P100 100 ABC
Current page
number
Colour button
bar
Date/time
e.g.
Using Teletext conveniently
Reveal hidden data
Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)
Press the “Red” button.
≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.
Change the screen size
You can change the Teletext screen size.
Press the “Green” button.
≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.
View temporarily a TV programme while the
Teletext screen is being displayed
Press the “Yellow” button.
≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.
View sub page
If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub
pages can be displayed.
1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of
the desired sub page with
the numbered buttons.
Sub page is displayed.
≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].
≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can
watch TV (> above).
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
(Normal)
(Top)
(Bottom)
Appears
when updating
is completed.
Broadcast
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 17 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
17
17
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Viewing Teletext (Digital broadcast only)
You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.
“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 16).
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support Teletext services.
1 While viewing the programme
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext screen appears.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4]
and the colour buttons.
To exit the screen
Press [TEXT ].
After performing step 1
Press [OPTION] and press the
corresponding colour button.
≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.
≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while
to be displayed.
≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character
Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)
Basic Teletext viewing
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
AUDIO
CH
ヵユヹヵ
,,,
OK
OPTION
TEXT
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
15. 05. 09 18:00:00P100 100 ABC
Current page
number
Colour button
bar
Date/time
e.g.
Using Teletext conveniently
Reveal hidden data
Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)
Press the “Red” button.
≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.
Change the screen size
You can change the Teletext screen size.
Press the “Green” button.
≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.
View temporarily a TV programme while the
Teletext screen is being displayed
Press the “Yellow” button.
≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.
View sub page
If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub
pages can be displayed.
1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of
the desired sub page with
the numbered buttons.
Sub page is displayed.
≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].
≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can
watch TV (> above).
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
(Normal)
(Top)
(Bottom)
Appears
when updating
is completed.
Broadcast
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 17 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
17
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Viewing Teletext (Digital broadcast only)
You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.
“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 16).
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support Teletext services.
1 While viewing the programme
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext screen appears.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4]
and the colour buttons.
To exit the screen
Press [TEXT ].
After performing step 1
Press [OPTION] and press the
corresponding colour button.
≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.
≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while
to be displayed.
≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character
Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)
Basic Teletext viewing
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
AUDIO
CH
ヵユヹヵ
,,,
OK
OPTION
TEXT
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
15. 05. 09 18:00:00P100 100 ABC
Current page
number
Colour button
bar
Date/time
e.g.
Using Teletext conveniently
Reveal hidden data
Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)
Press the “Red” button.
≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.
Change the screen size
You can change the Teletext screen size.
Press the “Green” button.
≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.
View temporarily a TV programme while the
Teletext screen is being displayed
Press the “Yellow” button.
≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.
View sub page
If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub
pages can be displayed.
1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of
the desired sub page with
the numbered buttons.
Sub page is displayed.
≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].
≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can
watch TV (> above).
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
(Normal)
(Top)
(Bottom)
Appears
when updating
is completed.
Broadcast
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 17 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
Možete uživati u odašiljanju putem teleteksta, uključujući vijesti,
vremenske prognoze i podnaslove, ako odašiljatelji omogućuju tu
uslugu.
• Možete provjeriti ima li program podatke na teletekstu. “TXT” je
označen na podacima o digitalnom kanalu (→ 16).
• Analogna odašiljanja ne podržavaju uslugu teleteksta.
Osnovno gledanje teleteksta
1 Tijekom gledanja programa pritisnite
[TEXT ].
Pojavit će se zaslon teleteksta.
npr.
2 Slijedite zaslonske upute.
Možete koristiti numeričke gumbe, navigacijske gumbe
[▲,▼] i gumbe u boji.
Izlazak iz zaslona
Pritisnite [TEXT ].
Praktično korištenje teleteksta
Nakon izvođenja koraka 1.
Pritisnite [OPTION] i potom gumb
odgovarajuće boje.
Prikaz skrivenih podataka
Prikazuje skrivene poruke. (npr. odgovore na stranici s kvizovima)
Pritisnite crveni gumb.
• Ponovno pritisnite crveni gumb za skrivanje poruka.
Promjena veličine zaslona
Možete promijeniti veličinu zaslona teleteksta.
Pritisnite zeleni gumb.
• Svakim pritiskom na zeleni gumb mijenja se zaslon.
(Normalan) (Vrh)
Privremen prikaz TV programa tijekom
prikaza zaslona teleteksta
Pritisnite žuti gumb.
• Ponovno pritisnite žuti gumb za povratak na ažuriranu stranicu
teleteksta.
Prikaz dodatnih stranica
Ako postoji jedna ili više dodatnih stranica, moguć je prikaz
odgovarajućih dodatnih stranica.
• Dodatnu stranicu možete odabrati i pomoću [◄,►].
• Pretraživanje može potrajati neko vrijeme, a dotad možete gledati
TV (→ gore).
• Podaci s teleteksta možda neće biti ispravno prikazani.
• Ako je dostupno mnogo podataka na teletekstu, može potrajati
dok se svi podaci ne prikažu.
• Znakovi teleteksta mogu se promijeniti putem "Postavljanje
znakova teleteksta" pod "Zaslon" u Izborniku za postavljanje.
(→ 68)
Broj trenutne
stranice
Traka s
gumbima u boji
Datum/vrijeme
2 Unesite 4-znamenkasti broj
željene dodatne stranice
pomoću numeričkih
gumbiju. Dodatna stranica
je prikazana.
(Dno)
1 Pritisnite plavi gumb.
Prikaz teleteksta (samo za digitalno odašiljanje)
Numerički
gumbi
Gumbi u boji
OPTION
(Mogućnost)
TEXT
(Tekst)
U redu
17
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Viewing Teletext (Digital broadcast only)
You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.
“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 16).
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support Teletext services.
1 While viewing the programme
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext screen appears.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4]
and the colour buttons.
To exit the screen
Press [TEXT ].
After performing step 1
Press [OPTION] and press the
corresponding colour button.
≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.
≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while
to be displayed.
≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character
Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)
Basic Teletext viewing
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
AUDIO
CH
ヵユヹヵ
,,,
OK
OPTION
TEXT
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
15. 05. 09 18:00:00P100 100 ABC
Current page
number
Colour button
bar
Date/time
e.g.
Using Teletext conveniently
Reveal hidden data
Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)
Press the “Red” button.
≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.
Change the screen size
You can change the Teletext screen size.
Press the “Green” button.
≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.
View temporarily a TV programme while the
Teletext screen is being displayed
Press the “Yellow” button.
≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.
View sub page
If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub
pages can be displayed.
1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of
the desired sub page with
the numbered buttons.
Sub page is displayed.
≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].
≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can
watch TV (> above).
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
(Normal)
(Top)
(Bottom)
Appears
when updating
is completed.
Broadcast
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 17 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
17
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Viewing Teletext (Digital broadcast only)
You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.
“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 16).
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support Teletext services.
1 While viewing the programme
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext screen appears.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4]
and the colour buttons.
To exit the screen
Press [TEXT ].
After performing step 1
Press [OPTION] and press the
corresponding colour button.
≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.
≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while
to be displayed.
≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character
Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)
Basic Teletext viewing
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
AUDIO
CH
ヵユヹヵ
,,,
OK
OPTION
TEXT
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
15. 05. 09 18:00:00P100 100 ABC
Current page
number
Colour button
bar
Date/time
e.g.
Using Teletext conveniently
Reveal hidden data
Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)
Press the “Red” button.
≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.
Change the screen size
You can change the Teletext screen size.
Press the “Green” button.
≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.
View temporarily a TV programme while the
Teletext screen is being displayed
Press the “Yellow” button.
≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.
View sub page
If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub
pages can be displayed.
1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of
the desired sub page with
the numbered buttons.
Sub page is displayed.
≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].
≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can
watch TV (> above).
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
(Normal)
(Top)
(Bottom)
Appears
when updating
is completed.
Broadcast
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 17 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
17
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Viewing Teletext (Digital broadcast only)
You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.
“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 16).
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support Teletext services.
1 While viewing the programme
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext screen appears.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4]
and the colour buttons.
To exit the screen
Press [TEXT ].
After performing step 1
Press [OPTION] and press the
corresponding colour button.
≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.
≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while
to be displayed.
≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character
Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)
Basic Teletext viewing
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
AUDIO
CH
ヵユヹヵ
,,,
OK
OPTION
TEXT
Numbered
buttons
Colour buttons
15. 05. 09 18:00:00P100 100 ABC
Current page
number
Colour button
bar
Date/time
e.g.
Using Teletext conveniently
Reveal hidden data
Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)
Press the “Red” button.
≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.
Change the screen size
You can change the Teletext screen size.
Press the “Green” button.
≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.
View temporarily a TV programme while the
Teletext screen is being displayed
Press the “Yellow” button.
≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.
View sub page
If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub
pages can be displayed.
1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of
the desired sub page with
the numbered buttons.
Sub page is displayed.
≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].
≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can
watch TV (> above).
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ABC
(Normal)
(Top)
(Bottom)
Appears
when updating
is completed.
Broadcast
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 17 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
Pojavljuje se
kad je ažuriranje
završeno.
Napomena
18
VQT3F54
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 31) for detail
information.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2 If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
3 Press [1] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR ›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [VCD]
Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
[CD]
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
∫ Resume play function
[HDD]
If you play the title that was viewed once, the title is played
back from the point you have last stopped.
To start playing the title from the beginning, refer to “To play
the title from the beginning [HDD]” (> 32)
≥Resume play function for discs > 31, Operation during play
≥During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,
this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/
NTSC) (> 69) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before
playing them.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC) setting to the recorded title
(> 69).
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,
pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you
may not always be able to control play as described in these
operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].
≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu
screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].
[VCD]
Press [RETURN ].
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫]
when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your
television screen and so on.
≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 65), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN
and press [OK].
Menu operation for other type of contents
≥DivX (> 33)
≥MP3 (> 37)
≥Still pictures (JPEG) (> 35)
≥Music on HDD (> 37)
≥Music CD (> 37)
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
DRIVE
SELECT
OK
,,,
OK
STOP
OPTION
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
PLAY/x1.3
(PLAY)
RETURN
AUDIO
OPEN/CLOSE
Numbered
buttons
e.g.,
5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]
Note
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 18 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
18
Reproduciranje snimljenog videosadržaja/Reproduciranje diskova play-only
Numerički
gumbi
DRIVE SELECT
(Odabir pogona)
RETURN
(Povratak)
(PLAY
(Reprodukcija))
OPEN/CLOSE (Otvori/zatvori)
OPTION
(Mogućnost)
U redu
Priprema
• Uključite TV prijamnik i odaberite odgovarajući AV priključak koji
će odgovarati priključcima na ovom uređaju.
• Uključite ovaj uređaj.
1 Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] (Odabir
pogona) da biste odabrali tvrdi disk
ili DVD pogon.
Indikator za HDD ili DVD će se upaliti na zaslonu uređaja.
2 Ako ste odabrali DVD pogon
Pritisnite [ OPEN/CLOSE] na
glavnom uređaju da biste otvorili
ladicu za disk i umetnuli disk.
• Ponovno pritisnite gumb i zatvorite ladicu.
3 Pritisnite [►] (PLAY (Reprodukcija)).
Reprodukcija započinje od najnovijeg snimljenog naslova.
Reprodukcija započinje od mjesta koje je odredio disk.
Reprodukcija započinje od početka diska.
■ Funkcija nastavka reprodukcije
Ako reproducirate naslov koji ste već gledali, naslov će se
reproducirati od trenutka gdje ste stali posljednji put. Da
biste pokrenuli reprodukciju naslova od početka, Pogledajte
poglavlje "Reprodukcija naslova od početka ” (→ 32)
• Funkcija nastavka reprodukcije za diskove → 31, Radnje
tijekom reprodukcije
Upravljanje izbornikom za drugu vrstu sadržaja
• DivX (→ 33)
• MP3 (→ 37)
• Fotograje (JPEG) (→ 35)
• Glazba na HDD-u (→ 37)
• Glazbeni CD (→ 37)
• Tijekom snimanja, vremena čekanja mjerača vremena za
snimanje ili stanja čekanja EXT LINK, ovaj uređaj ne može
reproducirati diskove koji ne odgovaraju postavkama "TV
System" (PAL/ NTSC) (→ 69). Postavite "TV sustav" da odgovara
diskovima prije nego što ih reproducirate.
• Prilikom reproduciranja naslova snimljenog na HDD-u, uskladite
postavku "TV sustav" (PAL/NTSC) na snimljenom naslovu (→ 69).
• Ovisno o disku, moglo bi proći neko vrijeme da se pokrenu zaslon
izbornika, slike, zvuk itd.
• Proizvođač diskova može kontrolirati kako se diskovi
reproduciraju. Zato nećete uvijek moći kontrolirati reproduciranje
kako je opisano u ovim uputama za uporabu. Pažljivo pročitajte
upute za diskove.
■ Kada se prikaže zaslon izbornika
Pritisnite [▲,▼,◄,►] za odabir stavke i pritisnite [OK].
• Neke se stavke mogu odabrati i pomoću numeričkih gumba.
• Ako na zaslonu izbornika ili u dokumentu s uputama za upotrebu
diska piše da pritisnete gumb "ENTER" pritisnite [OK].
Pritisnite numeričke gumbe za odabir stavke.
npr.
5: [0] → [5] 15: [1] → [5]
• Povratak na zaslon izbornika
1 Pritisnite [OPTION].
2 Pritisnite [▲,▼] za odabir "Glavnog izbornika" ili "Izbornika" i
pritisnite [OK].
Pritisnite [RETURN ].
• Diskovi se nastavljaju okretati za vrijeme prikaza izbornika. Kada
reprodukcija završi, pritisnite [■] da biste zaštitili motor uređaja,
zaslon TV prijamnika i tako dalje.
• Ako ste postavili roditeljsku zaštitu (→ 65) može se pojaviti zaslon
za unos 4-znamenkastog PIN-a. Unesite svoj 4-znamenkasti PIN
pomoću numeričkih gumbiju i potom pritisnite [OK].
Pogledajte poglavlje "Napredna reprodukcija"
(→ 31) za pojedinosti.
18
VQT3F54
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 31) for detail
information.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2 If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
3 Press [1] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR ›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [VCD]
Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
[CD]
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
∫ Resume play function
[HDD]
If you play the title that was viewed once, the title is played
back from the point you have last stopped.
To start playing the title from the beginning, refer to “To play
the title from the beginning [HDD]” (> 32)
≥Resume play function for discs > 31, Operation during play
≥During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,
this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/
NTSC) (> 69) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before
playing them.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC) setting to the recorded title
(> 69).
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,
pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you
may not always be able to control play as described in these
operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].
≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu
screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].
[VCD]
Press [RETURN ].
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫]
when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your
television screen and so on.
≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 65), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN
and press [OK].
Menu operation for other type of contents
≥DivX (> 33)
≥MP3 (> 37)
≥Still pictures (JPEG) (> 35)
≥Music on HDD (> 37)
≥Music CD (> 37)
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
DRIVE
SELECT
OK
,,,
OK
STOP
OPTION
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
PLAY/x1.3
(PLAY)
RETURN
AUDIO
OPEN/CLOSE
Numbered
buttons
e.g.,
5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]
Note
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 18 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
Napomena
Napomena
19
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Recording television programmes [HDD]
Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 22) for detail
information.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
≥Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times
(> 23)
3 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
≥(Analogue) When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”
(> 67), you can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (This operation does not
affect the audio of the recordings.)
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 65), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN
and press [OK].
≥If you record programmes on which “Child Lock” works partially,
PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.
≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information
(> 16) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.
≥If you try to record recording prohibited programmes, “$” is
displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, you can
record with subtitle or selected audio.
To record with subtitle
Before start recording, press [STTL ] to
show the subtitle.
If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language
(> 16).
≥Subtitle cannot be switched after recording.
To record with the selected audio
Before start recording, select the desired language for audio (> 16).
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select
the recording time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 20, 26) or while
using Flexible Recording (> 24).
≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated
for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch
Recording, if “Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup
menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
“D” means digital broadcasts.
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
REC MODE
STTL
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
REC
AUDIO
AUDIO
OK
CH
CH
ヵユヹヵ
DRIVE
SELECT
Numbered
buttons
e.g.
XP
34:47
SP
69:34
LP
139:08
EP
278:16
Recording Mode
Rec Mode Remain
SELECT
≥To record sound using
LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” to “LPCM” in
the Setup menu (> 68).
When recording digital broadcast with
subtitle or multiple audio
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
REC
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 19 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
19
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Recording television programmes [HDD]
Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 22) for detail
information.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
≥Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times
(> 23)
3 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
≥(Analogue) When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”
(> 67), you can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (This operation does not
affect the audio of the recordings.)
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 65), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN
and press [OK].
≥If you record programmes on which “Child Lock” works partially,
PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.
≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information
(> 16) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.
≥If you try to record recording prohibited programmes, “$” is
displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, you can
record with subtitle or selected audio.
To record with subtitle
Before start recording, press [STTL ] to
show the subtitle.
If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language
(> 16).
≥Subtitle cannot be switched after recording.
To record with the selected audio
Before start recording, select the desired language for audio (> 16).
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select
the recording time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 20, 26) or while
using Flexible Recording (> 24).
≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated
for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch
Recording, if “Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup
menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
“D” means digital broadcasts.
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
REC MODE
STTL
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
REC
AUDIO
AUDIO
OK
CH
CH
ヵユヹヵ
DRIVE
SELECT
Numbered
buttons
e.g.
XP
34:47
SP
69:34
LP
139:08
EP
278:16
Recording Mode
Rec Mode Remain
SELECT
≥To record sound using
LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” to “LPCM” in
the Setup menu (> 68).
When recording digital broadcast with
subtitle or multiple audio
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
REC
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 19 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
19
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Recording television programmes [HDD]
Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 22) for detail
information.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
≥Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times
(> 23)
3 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
≥(Analogue) When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”
(> 67), you can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (This operation does not
affect the audio of the recordings.)
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 65), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN
and press [OK].
≥If you record programmes on which “Child Lock” works partially,
PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.
≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information
(> 16) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.
≥If you try to record recording prohibited programmes, “$” is
displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, you can
record with subtitle or selected audio.
To record with subtitle
Before start recording, press [STTL ] to
show the subtitle.
If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language
(> 16).
≥Subtitle cannot be switched after recording.
To record with the selected audio
Before start recording, select the desired language for audio (> 16).
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select
the recording time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 20, 26) or while
using Flexible Recording (> 24).
≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated
for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch
Recording, if “Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup
menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
“D” means digital broadcasts.
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
REC MODE
STTL
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
REC
AUDIO
AUDIO
OK
CH
CH
ヵユヹヵ
DRIVE
SELECT
Numbered
buttons
e.g.
XP
34:47
SP
69:34
LP
139:08
EP
278:16
Recording Mode
Rec Mode Remain
SELECT
≥To record sound using
LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” to “LPCM” in
the Setup menu (> 68).
When recording digital broadcast with
subtitle or multiple audio
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
REC
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 19 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
19
VQT3F54
Basic
operations
Recording television programmes [HDD]
Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 22) for detail
information.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
≥Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times
(> 23)
3 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
≥(Analogue) When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”
(> 67), you can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (This operation does not
affect the audio of the recordings.)
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 65), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN
and press [OK].
≥If you record programmes on which “Child Lock” works partially,
PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.
≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information
(> 16) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.
≥If you try to record recording prohibited programmes, “$” is
displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, you can
record with subtitle or selected audio.
To record with subtitle
Before start recording, press [STTL ] to
show the subtitle.
If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language
(> 16).
≥Subtitle cannot be switched after recording.
To record with the selected audio
Before start recording, select the desired language for audio (> 16).
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select
the recording time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 20, 26) or while
using Flexible Recording (> 24).
≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated
for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch
Recording, if “Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup
menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
“D” means digital broadcasts.
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CHAPTER
REC
-10s
MANUAL SKIP
+60s
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
PAUSE
STOP
REC MODE
STTL
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
REC
AUDIO
AUDIO
OK
CH
CH
ヵユヹヵ
DRIVE
SELECT
Numbered
buttons
e.g.
XP
34:47
SP
69:34
LP
139:08
EP
278:16
Recording Mode
Rec Mode Remain
SELECT
≥To record sound using
LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” to “LPCM” in
the Setup menu (> 68).
When recording digital broadcast with
subtitle or multiple audio
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
REC
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 19 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
19
Osnovne radnje
Pogledajte poglavlje "Napomene u vezi sa
snimanjem" (→ 22) za pojedinosti.
Ova je funkcija samo za snimanje na HDD.
• Ne možete snimati TV programe izravno na disk. Snimite ih na
HDD i potom ih kopirajte na diskove. (→ 22)
Priprema
• Uključite TV prijamnik i odaberite odgovarajući AV priključak koji
će odgovarati priključcima na ovom uređaju.
• Uključite ovaj uređaj.
• Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] da biste odabrali HDD pogon.
1 Pritisnite [∧ ∨ CH] da biste odabrali
kanal.
• Možete odabrati kanal i pomoću numeričkih gumbiju.
Pritisnite numeričke gumbe i potom [OK].
npr. "D" znači digitalno odašiljanje.
2 Pritisnite [REC MODE] za odabir
načina snimanja (XP, SP, LP ili EP).
• Načini snimanja i približno trajanje snimanja/kopiranja
(→ 23)
1 Pritisnite [● REC] za pokretanje snimanja.
Snimanje će se izvršiti na slobodnom prostoru na HDD-u.
Podaci neće biti izbrisani.
• Nije moguće promijeniti kanal ili način snimanja dok je
snimanje u tijeku.
• Možete snimati dok je uređaj u stanju čekanja za mjerač
vremena snimanja. Međutim, kad se dostigne vrijeme
u mjeraču, svako snimanje će se zaustaviti i počet će
snimanje pomoću snimača.
• (Analogno) Kada je "Snimanje za kopiju visoke brzine"
postavljeno na "Isklj." (→ 67) možete promijeniti zvuk
[AUDIO] tijekom snimanja. (To neće utjecati na zvuk zapisa.)
■ Pauziranje snimanja
Pritisnite [II].
Ponovno pritisnite za ponovno pokretanje snimanja.
Također možete pritisnuti i [● REC] da biste ponovno pokrenuli
snimanje.
(Naslov nije podijeljen u zasebne dijelove.)
■ Zaustavljanje snimanja
Pritisnite [■].
• Od početka do kraja snimanja jedan je naslov.
• Ako ste postavili roditeljsku zaštitu (→ 65) može se pojaviti zaslon
za unos 4-znamenkastog PIN-a. Unesite svoj 4-znamenkasti PIN
pomoću numeričkih gumbiju i potom pritisnite [OK].
• Ako snimate program na kojem roditeljska zaštita radi djelomično,
prilikom reprodukcije zapisa bit će potrebno unijeti PIN.
• Kod snimanja digitalnog radioodašiljanja ili digitalnog odašiljanja
koje ne primate kako treba, podaci o digitalnom kanalu (→ 16) su
također snimljeni i ostaju vidljivi tijekom reprodukcije.
• Ako pokušate snimiti zabranjene programe, u gornjem lijevom
kutu zaslona će se pojaviti “ ”.
Snimanje digitalnog odašiljanja s
podnaslovima ili više zvukova
Ako program koji će se snimiti ima podnaslove ili više zvukova,
možete snimati s podnaslovima ili odabranim zvukom.
Snimanje s podnaslovima
Prije početka snimanja, pritisnite [STTL ] za prikaz podnaslova.
Ako program ima više podnaslova, odaberite željeni jezik. (→ 16)
• Podnaslov se ne može promijeniti nakon snimanja.
Snimanje s odabranim zvukom
Prije početka snimanja odaberite željeni jezik za zvuk (→ 16).
Odredite vrijeme prestanka snimanja –
Snimanje One touch
Tijekom snimanja
Da biste odabrali vrijeme snimanja, na
glavnom uređaju pritisnite [● REC].
• Možete odrediti što će se snimati do 4 sata kasnije.
• Promjene na zaslonu uređaja kako je prikazano u nastavku
ISKLJ. 0:30 → ISKLJ. 1:00 → ISKLJ. 1:30 → ISKLJ. 2:00
Counter (cancel) ← ISKLJ. 4:00 ← ISKLJ. 3:00
• Ovo ne radi tijekom snimanja mjeračem vremena (→ 20, 26) ili
prilikom korištenja eksibilnog snimanja (→ 24).
• Ovaj je uređaj uključen na stanje čekanja kad se njime ne upravlja
otprilike 5 minuta nakon završetka snimanja "One touch", ako je
"Automatsko stanje čekanja nakon OTR-a" postavljeno na "Uklj."
u postavkama. (Zadana postavka: "Uklj.") (→ 71).
Poništavanje
Pritisnite [● REC] na glavnom uređaju nekoliko puta dok se ne
pojavi brojilo.
• Poništeno je vrijeme prestanka snimanja, ali se snimanje
nastavlja.
Zaustavljanje snimanja
Pritisnite [■].
Snimanje televizijskih programa
Numerički
gumbi
DRIVE SELECT
(Odabir pogona)
REC MODE
(Način
snimanja)
• Za snimanje zvuka pomoću
LPCM (samo u načinu XP):
Postavite "Način zvuka za
XP snimanje" na "LPCM" u
Izborniku za postavljanje
(→ 68).
● SNIMANJE
U redu
AUDIO (Zvuk)
STTL
Napomena
20
VQT3F54
Timer recording [HDD]
Refer to “Advanced timer recording [HDD]” (> 26–
30) for detail information.
See also “Notes for recording” (> 22).
Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the
title you are trying to record.
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to
suit the connections to this unit.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 70).
≥TV Guide system is available only when “TV Guide” is set to “On”
in the Setup menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
≥Depending on the broadcasting, programme information of
the TV Guide may not be correct. In this case, make timer
recordings manually (> 26).
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 26, step 3).
≥If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the
start recording time and finish recording time can be set to a
margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time,
Finish Recording Time)
≥Programme Name may not be displayed correctly on the
“Timer Recording” screen. In this case, enter the
Programme Name manually (> 50).
3 Press [OK].
≥The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
∫ To delete a timer recording setting on the TV
Guide screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK].
“Selection Screen” appears.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV
Guide disappears.)
≥You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are not updated.
≥TV Guide system of this unit does not support analogue
broadcasts.
Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually (> 26) or with the
S
HOWVIEW system (> 30).
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
Using the TV Guide system to make
timer recordings (Digital broadcast
only)
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
G
U
I
D
E
GUIDE
AUDIO
Landscape
:
Wed 12.10.11 19:32
All Channels
SELECT
RETURN
Page
Page
+24 hours
Prog. Type
All Types
Category
:
: In today’s show we will...
Emmerdale
Emmerdale
Wed 12.10.
TV Guide
Time
Guide
Change Display Mode
info
OPTION:
Free Word Search
e.g.,
≥If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [3, 4] to select
“Rec.” and press [OK].
– “View” > 15, Watching TV
– “Delete” > below
∫ To cancel recording when recording has
already begun (>
27)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(>
27)
∫ Notes on timer recording (>
27)
∫ To use S
HOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings (Analogue broadcast only)(>
30)
Selection Screen
Tue 11.10.11 18:03
RETURN
OK
View
Rec.
Delete
Tue 11.10.11
e.g.
Timer
Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
Stop DriveStartChannel Date
STTL
17:30 18. 10. TUE OFF
1 ARD
Programme Name
HDD
All Channels : ARD
WED 12.10.11. 19:32:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
16:00
SP
19:30 20:00 20:30
D.I.Y. SOS
H lid P
Timer icon
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 20 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
20
VQT3F54
Timer recording [HDD]
Refer to “Advanced timer recording [HDD]” (> 26–
30) for detail information.
See also “Notes for recording” (> 22).
Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the
title you are trying to record.
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to
suit the connections to this unit.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 70).
≥TV Guide system is available only when “TV Guide” is set to “On”
in the Setup menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
≥Depending on the broadcasting, programme information of
the TV Guide may not be correct. In this case, make timer
recordings manually (> 26).
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 26, step 3).
≥If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the
start recording time and finish recording time can be set to a
margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time,
Finish Recording Time)
≥Programme Name may not be displayed correctly on the
“Timer Recording” screen. In this case, enter the
Programme Name manually (> 50).
3 Press [OK].
≥The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
∫ To delete a timer recording setting on the TV
Guide screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK].
“Selection Screen” appears.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV
Guide disappears.)
≥You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are not updated.
≥TV Guide system of this unit does not support analogue
broadcasts.
Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually (> 26) or with the
S
HOWVIEW system (> 30).
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
Using the TV Guide system to make
timer recordings (Digital broadcast
only)
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
G
U
I
D
E
GUIDE
AUDIO
Landscape
:
Wed 12.10.11 19:32
All Channels
SELECT
RETURN
Page
Page
+24 hours
Prog. Type
All Types
Category
:
: In today’s show we will...
Emmerdale
Emmerdale
Wed 12.10.
TV Guide
Time
Guide
Change Display Mode
info
OPTION:
Free Word Search
e.g.,
≥If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [3, 4] to select
“Rec.” and press [OK].
– “View” > 15, Watching TV
– “Delete” > below
∫ To cancel recording when recording has
already begun (>
27)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(>
27)
∫ Notes on timer recording (>
27)
∫ To use S
HOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings (Analogue broadcast only)(>
30)
Selection Screen
Tue 11.10.11 18:03
RETURN
OK
View
Rec.
Delete
Tue 11.10.11
e.g.
Timer
Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
Stop DriveStartChannel Date
STTL
17:30 18. 10. TUE OFF
1 ARD
Programme Name
HDD
All Channels : ARD
WED 12.10.11. 19:32:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
16:00
SP
19:30 20:00 20:30
D.I.Y. SOS
H lid P
Timer icon
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 20 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
VQT3F54
20
Snimanje mjeračem vremena
VODIČ
U redu
Ova je funkcija samo za snimanje na HDD.
• Ne možete snimati TV programe izravno na disk. Snimite ih na
HDD i potom ih kopirajte na diskove. (→ 22)
Pogledajte i "Napomene u vezi sa snimanjem" (→ 22).
Ovisno o vrsti odašiljanja, mogu postojati neka ograničenja na
naslovu koji pokušavate snimiti.
• Unaprijed možete unijeti do 32 programa mjesečno. (Svakodnevni
ili tjedni programi broje se kao jedan program.)
Priprema
• Uključite TV prijamnik i odaberite odgovarajući priključak za video,
koji će odgovarati priključcima na ovom uređaju.
• Pobrinite se da je sat postavljen na točno vrijeme (→ 70).
• Sustav TV vodiča dostupan je samo kada je "TV vodič" postavljen
na "Uklj." u Izborniku za postavljanje. (Zadana postavka: “Uklj.”)
(→ 71)
Snimanje mjeračem vremena putem TV
vodiča (samo za digitalno odašiljanje)
TV vodič pruža podatke o programima samo s postaje koja se
odašilje digitalno i prikazuje na TV prijamniku, poput časopisa TV
vodiča.
• Ovisno o odašiljanju, podaci o programu u TV vodiču ne
moraju biti točni. U tom slučaju ručno postavite snimanje
mjeračem vremena (→ 26).
1 Pritisnite [GUIDE].
npr.
2 Pritisnite [▲,▼,◄,►] da biste odabrali
budući program i pritisnite [OK].
• Ako je prikazan "Zaslon za odabir", pritisnite [▲,▼] za
odabir "Snimanje" i pritisnite [OK].
npr.
– "Pregled" → 15, Gledanje TV-a
– "Brisanje" → u nastavku
• Provjerite program (početno i završno vrijeme) u TV
časopisu itd. i unesite ispravke ako je potrebno pomoću
[▲,▼,◄,►] (→ 26, korak 3.).
• Ako postavljate snimanje mjeračem vremena putem TV
vodiča, vrijeme početka i završetka snimanja može biti
postavljeno uz odstupanje od 10 minuta. (→ 67, Pokreni
vrijeme snimanja, Završi vrijeme snimanja)
• Naziv programa možda neće biti ispravno prikazan na
zaslonu "Snimanje mjeračem vremena". U tom slučaju
unesite naziv programa ručno (→ 50).
3 Pritisnite [OK].
• Program na mjeraču vremena je spremljen i prikazuje se
ikona mjerača vremena.
"" svijetli na zaslonu uređaja da bi se pokazalo da je
aktivirano stanje čekanja snimanja mjeračem vremena.
Ponovite korake 2 – 3 kako biste programirali ostala
snimanja.
Pritisnite [ ] da biste isključili uređaj.
■ Brisanje postavki snimanja mjeračem vremena
na zaslonu TV vodiča
Pritisnite [▲,▼,◄,►] da biste odabrali program u TV vodiču i
pritisnite [OK]. Pojavljuje se Zaslon za odabir.
Pritisnite [▲,▼] da biste odabrali "Brisanje" i pritisnite [OK].
Pritisnite [◄,►] za odabir "Da" i pritisnite [OK]. ("" u TV vodiču
nestaje.)
• Ne možete promijeniti podnaslove tijekom snimanja mjeračem
vremena.
• Ako je uređaj isključen iz mrežnog kabela, neće se ažurirati
podaci o programima.
• Sustav TV vodiča ovog uređaja ne podržava analogna odašiljanja.
• Analogna odašiljanja mogu se snimiti ručno (→ 26) ili pomoću
sustava SHOWVIEW (→ 30).
• Prijam podataka TV vodiča moguć je samo kroz priključak za
antenu ovog uređaja. Prijam podataka TV vodiča vanjski spojenim
satelitskim prijamnikom nije moguć.
■ Zaustavljanje snimanja koje je već započelo
(→ 27)
■ Poništavanje stanja čekanja na snimanje na
uređaju (→ 27)
■ Napomene u vezi sa snimanjem mjeračem
vremena (→ 27)
■ Korištenje gumba SHOWVIEW za snimanje
mjeračem vremena (samo za analogno
odašiljanje)(→ 30)
Pogledajte poglavlje "Napredno snimanje
mjeračem vremena " ( → 26 – 30) za
pojedinosti.
Ikona mjerača vremena
20
VQT3F54
Timer recording [HDD]
Refer to “Advanced timer recording [HDD]” (> 26–
30) for detail information.
See also “Notes for recording” (> 22).
Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the
title you are trying to record.
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to
suit the connections to this unit.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 70).
≥TV Guide system is available only when “TV Guide” is set to “On”
in the Setup menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
≥Depending on the broadcasting, programme information of
the TV Guide may not be correct. In this case, make timer
recordings manually (> 26).
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 26, step 3).
≥If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the
start recording time and finish recording time can be set to a
margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time,
Finish Recording Time)
≥Programme Name may not be displayed correctly on the
“Timer Recording” screen. In this case, enter the
Programme Name manually (> 50).
3 Press [OK].
≥The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
∫ To delete a timer recording setting on the TV
Guide screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK].
“Selection Screen” appears.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV
Guide disappears.)
≥You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are not updated.
≥TV Guide system of this unit does not support analogue
broadcasts.
Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually (> 26) or with the
S
HOWVIEW system (> 30).
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
Using the TV Guide system to make
timer recordings (Digital broadcast
only)
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
G
U
I
D
E
GUIDE
AUDIO
Landscape
:
Wed 12.10.11 19:32
All Channels
SELECT
RETURN
Page
Page
+24 hours
Prog. Type
All Types
Category
:
: In today’s show we will...
Emmerdale
Emmerdale
Wed 12.10.
TV Guide
Time
Guide
Change Display Mode
info
OPTION:
Free Word Search
e.g.,
≥If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [3, 4] to select
“Rec.” and press [OK].
– “View” > 15, Watching TV
– “Delete” > below
∫ To cancel recording when recording has
already begun (>
27)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(>
27)
∫ Notes on timer recording (>
27)
∫ To use S
HOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings (Analogue broadcast only)(>
30)
Selection Screen
Tue 11.10.11 18:03
RETURN
OK
View
Rec.
Delete
Tue 11.10.11
e.g.
Timer
Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
Stop DriveStartChannel Date
STTL
17:30 18. 10. TUE OFF
1 ARD
Programme Name
HDD
All Channels : ARD
WED 12.10.11. 19:32:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
16:00
SP
19:30 20:00 20:30
D.I.Y. SOS
H lid P
Timer icon
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 20 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
20
VQT3F54
Timer recording [HDD]
Refer to “Advanced timer recording [HDD]” (> 26–
30) for detail information.
See also “Notes for recording” (> 22).
Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the
title you are trying to record.
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to
suit the connections to this unit.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 70).
≥TV Guide system is available only when “TV Guide” is set to “On”
in the Setup menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
≥Depending on the broadcasting, programme information of
the TV Guide may not be correct. In this case, make timer
recordings manually (> 26).
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 26, step 3).
≥If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the
start recording time and finish recording time can be set to a
margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time,
Finish Recording Time)
≥Programme Name may not be displayed correctly on the
“Timer Recording” screen. In this case, enter the
Programme Name manually (> 50).
3 Press [OK].
≥The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
∫ To delete a timer recording setting on the TV
Guide screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK].
“Selection Screen” appears.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV
Guide disappears.)
≥You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are not updated.
≥TV Guide system of this unit does not support analogue
broadcasts.
Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually (> 26) or with the
S
HOWVIEW system (> 30).
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
Using the TV Guide system to make
timer recordings (Digital broadcast
only)
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
G
U
I
D
E
GUIDE
AUDIO
Landscape
:
Wed 12.10.11 19:32
All Channels
SELECT
RETURN
Page
Page
+24 hours
Prog. Type
All Types
Category
:
: In today’s show we will...
Emmerdale
Emmerdale
Wed 12.10.
TV Guide
Time
Guide
Change Display Mode
info
OPTION:
Free Word Search
e.g.,
≥If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [3, 4] to select
“Rec.” and press [OK].
– “View” > 15, Watching TV
– “Delete” > below
∫ To cancel recording when recording has
already begun (>
27)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(>
27)
∫ Notes on timer recording (>
27)
∫ To use S
HOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings (Analogue broadcast only)(>
30)
Selection Screen
Tue 11.10.11 18:03
RETURN
OK
View
Rec.
Delete
Tue 11.10.11
e.g.
Timer
Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
Stop DriveStartChannel Date
STTL
17:30 18. 10. TUE OFF
1 ARD
Programme Name
HDD
All Channels : ARD
WED 12.10.11. 19:32:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
16:00
SP
19:30 20:00 20:30
D.I.Y. SOS
H lid P
Timer icon
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 20 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
20
VQT3F54
Timer recording [HDD]
Refer to “Advanced timer recording [HDD]” (> 26–
30) for detail information.
See also “Notes for recording” (> 22).
Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the
title you are trying to record.
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to
suit the connections to this unit.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 70).
≥TV Guide system is available only when “TV Guide” is set to “On”
in the Setup menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
≥Depending on the broadcasting, programme information of
the TV Guide may not be correct. In this case, make timer
recordings manually (> 26).
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 26, step 3).
≥If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the
start recording time and finish recording time can be set to a
margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time,
Finish Recording Time)
≥Programme Name may not be displayed correctly on the
“Timer Recording” screen. In this case, enter the
Programme Name manually (> 50).
3 Press [OK].
≥The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
∫ To delete a timer recording setting on the TV
Guide screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK].
“Selection Screen” appears.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV
Guide disappears.)
≥You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are not updated.
≥TV Guide system of this unit does not support analogue
broadcasts.
Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually (> 26) or with the
S
HOWVIEW system (> 30).
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
This function is only for recording on HDD.
≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
Using the TV Guide system to make
timer recordings (Digital broadcast
only)
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
INPUT
SELECT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
CH
CH
PAGE
SLOW/SEARCH
VOL
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
STATUS
EXIT
OPTION
RETURN
DELETE
OK
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
G
U
I
D
E
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PAUSE LIVE TV
SKIP
OK
,,,
OK
G
U
I
D
E
GUIDE
AUDIO
Landscape
:
Wed 12.10.11 19:32
All Channels
SELECT
RETURN
Page
Page
+24 hours
Prog. Type
All Types
Category
:
: In today’s show we will...
Emmerdale
Emmerdale
Wed 12.10.
TV Guide
Time
Guide
Change Display Mode
info
OPTION:
Free Word Search
e.g.,
≥If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [3, 4] to select
“Rec.” and press [OK].
– “View” > 15, Watching TV
– “Delete” > below
∫ To cancel recording when recording has
already begun (>
27)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(>
27)
∫ Notes on timer recording (>
27)
∫ To use S
HOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings (Analogue broadcast only)(>
30)
Selection Screen
Tue 11.10.11 18:03
RETURN
OK
View
Rec.
Delete
Tue 11.10.11
e.g.
Timer
Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
Stop DriveStartChannel Date
STTL
17:30 18. 10. TUE OFF
1 ARD
Programme Name
HDD
All Channels : ARD
WED 12.10.11. 19:32:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
16:00
SP
19:30 20:00 20:30
D.I.Y. SOS
H lid P
Timer icon
Note
DMREX645EP-VQT3F54_eng.book 20 ページ ２０１１年８月１１日 木曜日 午後３時１８分
Napomena
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
Page is loading ...
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
Panasonic DMREX645EP Operating instructions
- Category
- Mixer/food processor accessories
- Type
- Operating instructions
Ask a question and I''ll find the answer in the document
Finding information in a document is now easier with AI
Related papers
-
Panasonic Diga DMR-EX83 Operating Instructions Manual
-
Panasonic DMREH545EG Owner's manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Other documents
-
Samsung DVD-HR735 User manual
-
-
Samsung DVD-HR720 User manual
-
Sony DVX-11A User manual
-
Pioneer DV-220V-K Operating instructions
-
LG RHT498H User manual
-
Durabrand ADB2737BD Quick Setup Manual
-
LG RH277H-P1L User manual
-
Philips 32PFT5501/12 User manual
-
Philips 55PUS9109/12 User manual